Home

Non Mitsubishi Product 2 - Allied Automation, Inc.

Contents

1. GOT and the PLC CD 1 Clamped by hood RD RXD 2 1 TXD RS 232 cable SD TXD 3 3 RXD ER DTR 4 12 RTS 1 Connection diagram DTR SG 5 14 GND a RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side DR DSR 6 2 RS RTS 7 6 CTS CD 1 4 1 FG i CS CTS 8 RD RXD 2 W 2 TXD 1 1 9 SD TXD 3 3 ER DTR 4 i DSR RS 232 connection diagram SG 5 rJ 7 GND 2 diagram 9 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side DR DSR 9 CD 1 ee 1 FG RS RTS 7 m 4 RTS S RD RXD 2 W 2 TXD CS CTS k 5 CTS i SD TXD 3 3 RXD 9 8 EST d ER DTR 4 6 DSR SG 5 m 7 SG b RS 232 connection diagram 2 4 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side RIBS 28 15 s RS RTS 7 H iJ 4 RS CD 1 1 FG CS CTS 5 CS RD RXD 2 2 TXD 9 8 SD TXD 3 3 RXD 4 ER DTR 4 L4 DSR f RS 232 connection diagram SG f RS ES connection diagram 6 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side DR DSR 6 j 9 DR eee i CD 1 foe 1 FG RS RTS 7 LJ 4 RTS RD RXD 2 M 2 TXD CS CTS ku 5
2. Connection cable 1 T t RS232C RS485 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model Commu connectable Connection Max Model ce Cable model Max Option equipment Model name nication DRE 5 quip diagram distance name Connection diagram number distance device number Ue UT320 UT321 Built into UT350 7 1 Use RS 485 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m or UT420 connection 4200m 12 RS 232 15m UT450 diagram 1 568 232 connection UT520 4 wire type diagram 1 27 UT550 GT15 RS2 9P UT551 c 0175072 UP350 UP351 Built into 2 UP550 GOT 23 750 53 485 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Up to 31 t ti UM330 connection 1200m Mi2 Rs 232 o 15m 0 331 diagram 5 Us RS 232 connection controllers for 1 UM350 2 wire type diagram 1 27 GOT W UMas1 GT15 RS2 9P 051000 lt GT 27 Built into GT GOT 23 User GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Use RS 485 UP750 connection 1200m 12 RS 232 15 lt 077503 diagram 9 GADRS 232 connection GT 2 wire type diagram 1 27 lt GT15 RS2 9P o O x 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation gt 2 Connect the connect
3. PLC Connection cable GOT Maximum Number of connectable Ethernet ga Cable model segment Option device Model equipment Module 2 length SIMATIC CP 243 1 57 200 243 11 When PLC GOT is 1 SIMATIC 128 PLCs or less for 1 CP 343 1 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or GOT 7 300 Advanced IT unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Built into GOT of category 5 or higher 400m Built into GOT When PLC GOT is 1 CP 443 1 i The following shows the Shielded twisted pair cable STP or number of GOTs for 1 PLC SIMATIC CP 443 1 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP 57 400 Advanced IT of category 3 or higher 32orless recommended Built into GOT to 16 or less pii Built into GOT 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade c
4. units 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader Settings by switch communication RS 485 communication RS 422 485 switch setting switch c Item Set value Terminating resistor Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps selection switch DCE DTE switch Data bit 8bits fixed m Parity bit Even Odd None DBOBndB HE Stop bit 1bit fixed 0 Station No 1 fixed U 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings E POWER N a DATA OUT TXD a 77 RXD AE E RXD O DATA CH T e HH f z 1 Settings of transmission speed and MANUAL AUTO 5 MANUAL AUTO MONITOR BIT RATE Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 9600bps ON ON OFF Transmission OFF OFF speed 38400bps ON OFF ON MANUAL jode AUTO ON 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 15 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 Settings of DCE DTE RS 422 485 and terminating 5 5 5 Connecting to interface resistor selection converter SI 30A
5. 4 11 43 1 RS 232 cable didi comm cond ated etie culta Od e e rede E 4 11 ROME celer 4 12 4 4 GOT Side Settings dodi o gt E 4 13 4 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 4 13 4 4 2 Communication detail 4 13 4 5 PLO Side Setting ied e c eb o ve 4 14 4 5 1 Connecting to NV1L RS2 1 2 4 14 4 5 2 Connecting to 54 7 4 15 4 5 3 2 ett reete ee desta 4 16 4 5 4 Connecting to FFK120A C10 nennen 4 17 4 5 5 Station number settings nesenie Ie ee cde cti 4 18 4 6 Device Range that Can Be 000000000 4 19 4 64 F JIMICREX F Series nete needs 4 19 427 Precautions E E etd 4 21 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 Connectable Model List 5 2 System Configuration 5 niinniin enne d th dd edd ded edd de ed d edd i dde 5 3 5 2 1 Connecting to PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 or 9 77 5 3
6. Setting item Set value DCE DTE Communication settings DCE DTE DCE Foo M nee Make the communication settings using setting RS 422 485 RS 485 pum Switches Terminating resistor TERMINATOR Item Set value OFF ON OFF TET selection Transmission speed 9600bps MANUAL AUTO AUTO DCE DTE switching DCE Terminating resistor M ON OFF selection 1 Set as necessary Settings by switch UNEEYE e RS 232C RS 485 CONVERTER POWER 5304 DCE DTE switch RS 232C DTE mo DCE SWA 0090909999090 pease 7 DIP SW B 7 DRIVER Communication ar an setting switch B F gt F 80 SISSIES 1 Settings of transmission speed MANUAL AUTO and terminating resistor selection Switch No of DIP SWB Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 Transmission o600bps ON ON OFF speed MANUAL AUTO AUTO ON Terminating Enable ON resistor Disable OFF selection 1 Set as necessary 2 Setting of DCE DTE switching Setting item Set value DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE SWA 5 16 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 5 6 Connecting to interface 5 5 7 Connecting to interface converter KS 485 converter K3SC 10
7. Parameter settings completed Sends a Message Receive instruction Execute Message receive function MSG RCV When the receive message command coil Execute turns on the executing coil Busy turns on The normal completion coil Complete or abnormal completion coil Error turns on at the completion of processing Receive message abort coil Communication device type Dev Typ 5 2171 Communication protocols Pro Typ 1 MEMOBUS Line number 1 For 2171F any of 1 to 16 set in 2 Transmission buffer channel number Ch No 1 Always 1 for 2171 Checking the normal completion Does the normal completion coil turn on Increments the normal pass counter by 1 Checking the abnormal completion Does the abnormal completion coil turn on Increments the abnormal pass counter by 1 Stores the processing results Stores the status 1 Set 0 to the PARAMOS to 11 of the MSG input relay input register coil holding register offset Do not make the offset settings When the offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the 0010 gt END_IF 0010 NL 1 5 000004 08000400 0011 O 0011 LI NL 1 0012 MSG RCV 0013 NL 1 Execute 5 000004 Busy DB000210 Abort 0 000400 Complete 08000211 Dev Typ 00005 Error DB000212 Pro Typ 00001 Cir No 00001 Ch No 00001
8. For the RS 232 connection Connection cable GOT Number of Power Communication Met Me el NUR connectable name ication onnection diagram Ista ption device ode 1 Supplies Modules Type fans J Built into GOT IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 8 232 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS 232 pesi 52 15m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 connection diagram 1 Es IC693PWR328 k GT15 RS2 9P o 2 2 GT 27 o Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 23 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 Use RS 232 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS 232 pus So 15m 1PLC for 1 GOT IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 connection diagram 1 BE IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15 RS2 9P Built into GOT IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 RS 232 8 RS 232 15m IC693PWR332 connection diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 11 2 System Configuration For the RS 422 connection connecting to the Communication Modules PLC Connection cable GOT Cable model UR Commun Power Communication TFN Connection Max 4 Model name 4 ication 4 Option device Model Supplies Modules diag
9. Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of Conversion Model Communication Cable model Max 758 CI connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance P equipment GT 27 W BF 28 0500 0 5m _ Built into GOT pA W BF 28 1000 1m 4 W BF 28 3000 3m 45m GT Us8 RS 232 connection 27 GT15 RS2 9P diagram 1 RS 232 GT 27 Built into GOT 93 T W BF 02 0500 0 5m AM 1 ae 4 15 FAX067 emperature H PCP B is en a on controller W BF 02 3000 3m 27 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P GT 27 Built into GOT 93 T RS 422 Uss RS 422 connection 1200m _ diagram 1 GT 27 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 7 9 2 System Configuration x l e E Z O 2 a E o Y 2 Z E 2 2 O When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Modular connector 1 Connection cable 1 Modular connector 2 Modular connector 1 Connection cable 2 Communication driver Cie RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT i m i TET Max Number of Model Communication Cable oe x ca
10. oF N A NC 13 RSA RTS 14 NC 15 RSB RTS 16 NC 17 CSA CTS 18 NC 19 CSB CTS 20 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 i 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal param Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 uj zi J O E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O 2 E 2 2 O 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 9 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 10 5 GOT side RS 485 connection diagram 5 processes SDA1 Temperature controller side 4 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG 1 o o 0c ON mM Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2 2 Temperature controller side 1 1 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table
11. terminating resistor Connection cable 1 Z COM Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT TETE umber o Model Terminating cani mod Model Communic mod E Max Option connectable uM Connection diagram Connection diagram equipment name resistor distance name ation Type distance device q number number Up to 16 Z Bui COMs W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 28 0500 0 5m 1 for 1 GOT W BF 02 1000 4m t W BF 28 1000 1m iio SOT Z TIO Up to 16 02 1 28 1 Z CT Up to 16 Z COM W BW 02 TU 1200 RS 232 300031 15m or or GT Z DIO Up to 16 RS 422 83 232 crs M connection diagram 2 connection diagram 2 RS2 9P DIO Up to 31 Up to for Z COM 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 10 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly to communication extension module Z COM Communication driver Ce RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS terminating resistor Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Z COM Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Max Number of Model Communic Terminating ganie moce Celle modsi connectable Connection diagram Connectiondiagram d
12. 14 3 14 2 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 14 4 14 2 3 Connection Diagram D a n LT em 14 5 14 2 4 GOT Side Settings iilii neni ni deed 14 6 14 2 5 PEG Side Setting iere de ater al ende ed tt te d een ran 14 7 14 2 6 Connecting to HMI 14 7 14 2 7 Connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 14 8 Precautii bte etm Oii aaO eiu RE 14 8 14 3 Etlierriet CODectlon cher TR Re EE a ORARE AIRE 14 9 14 31 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Ethernet connection type 2 14 9 14 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 1200 series Ethernet connection type OP 14 10 14 3 3 GOT Side Settings o eet e be HERE Ue conecte tees 14 11 14 34 PLC side setting iilii diem di eden det ee dt deed edie edd ieee 14 13 14 3 5 gt o creen teet Eee tite fad P eb D d Carte hg ten eiat 14 14 14 4 Device Range that Can Be 1 eese eterne tnra nda 14 15 14 4 1 SIEMENS S7 300 400 14 17 14 4 2 SIEMENS 57 200 Seriesin
13. 9 18 9 2 7 Connection to PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500 MA900 901 AG500 JUS 9 20 920 Connection to TEVA tet mH D One OR CERE Rd 9 23 9 2 9 Connection to SRX i id du o quiu 9 26 9 210 Connecting to SB1 tette dcn eese rra 9 27 9 2 11 400 eade do edad EEA d 9 29 ocn oet ien itt PC cxi a Ra cH E RP TAX RR 9 30 93A 232 tert 9 30 9 3 2 R9 422 cable da sed RF n MER ERA 9 31 9 3 3 485 cable ee 9 33 GOT Side Settings i tuas 9 39 9 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 9 39 9 4 2 Communication detail 9 39 Temperature Controller Side Setting sess 9 41 9 521 Connecting to HPC PJ eti eme Rn e erras 9 41 9 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A 9 42 9 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO 2 2 0222 11 006000 000000000000 100 9 43 9 5 4 Connecting to 2 9 44 9 55 Connecting to CB Series iie cede a e dee e t eer ie geh ie auge 9 45 9 5 6 Connecting
14. nennen 8 29 8 5 2 Connecting to UT100 5 8 30 8 5 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 000000 00 eene tete tenen nee 8 30 8 5 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced 5 8 30 8 5 5 Connecting to RS232C RS485 converter 2 8 31 8 6 8 7 98 5 6 Station number setting ace ER o RE HN CORRER IAE TRI 8 32 Device Range that Can Be 8 33 8 6 1 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced em 8 33 e 8 34 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Model eet UE Shee eet tede N 9 2 System Configuration ede cede ce dec Ade nene ded dd ete dede ded dede 9 4 9 21 Connecting to FIEPODPJ iiit 9 4 9 2 2 Connecting to H PCP A 9 7 9 2 3 Gonnectingito SRZ 2 2 oiii ned dena erecto etie Y ee aereis 9 9 9 2 4 Connecting to CB Series CB100 400 CB500 CB700 9 9 12 9 2 5 Connecting to FB series FB100 FB400 or 9 9 14 9 2 6 Connecting to RB Series RB100 RB400 RB500 RB700 9
15. eftt pet 11 15 11 7 PRECAUTIONS tite geb 11 15 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 12 2 12 2 System Configuration cc ccc e anni pra 12 3 12 2 1 Connecting to 805 1205 12 3 1272 2 Connecting to K200S cured Leere Aa aided pee al ia ee teed ad 12 5 12 2 3 Connecting to KS00S e Db ga E t P ee tn tects 12 6 12 3 Connection BIagram o eR MR RE EA NI c M Etc MER EE 12 7 12 3 1 RS 232 cablg 6a tec b ote Elit a itr Rom LIE 12 7 12 3 2 4RS 422 cable ioni niei Eod di LLL dd d nee Ee rei di ree te eee 12 7 12 4 GOT Side Settingsz aaa aaah czas a ed ee 12 9 12 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 12 9 12 4 2 Communication detail 12 9 12 5 LPEGC Side Setting assieme omaia demum conem 12 10 12 5 1 Connecting to PEG CPU ne tiene e et uei te oe e edid Oe 12 10 12 5 2 Connecting to Cnet I F nemen 12 10 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set
16. 4 19 Gf Precautions e ees Voi eee 4 21 J 2 gt O z LE o 2 2 O 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock pip put Connectable model Refer to RS 232 GT GT E RS 485 9 421 RS 232 GT IGT p m RS 485 Pn F120S RS 232 GT GT F140S x RS 485 7423 15 4 2 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable Model List 4 2 System Configuration 4 2 1 Connecting to MICREX F55 For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following section 97 4 7 Precautions When using the RS 232 interface card Communication driver MICREX F Connection cable a PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C Commun Number of connectable oae interface ication us Option device Model equipment 4 Connection diagram number distance LE card Type 2 9 Built into GOT m GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m 2 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C 55 NV1L RS2 RS 232 or 15m ee 2 Us GT interface card Gee RS 232 connection diagram 1 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the
17. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 0 EFIO 1 B E EQOA AA A AIO 1 Byte A I i2 BEES A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 EQ O 1 2 EFI number O 1 2 EFI number T9 AA 0 2 Byte number 4 Device Input position 1 to 8 A 0 2 Byte number e Module number 1 to 12 DA RS232 data n AX 0 99 Dec Byte number Safety controller to RS232 b Logic result LQ Logic input WA Device A 0 49 Dec Word number w Word virtualization of D GOT independent device L 143 zl 7 device Not available WoO D1 Upper bits Device Bit position 0 to 7 DO Lower bits name Byte number 0 to 3 LD LDA 0 3 Byte number RS232 to safety controller c EFI input El WA Device A 0 1 Word number _ Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device E 2 3 3 device Not available T LWO LD1 Upper bits Device Byte number 0 to 3 LDO Lower bits Device number 1 to 3 1 When the mapping position is changed by the engineering software for SICK a mismatch occurs between virtual EFI number 1 to 2 devices on GOT and SICK safety controller mapping devices When mapping is changed use D devices or LD devices 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 5 13 5 Device Range That Can Be Set 3 When using offset specification When setting devices using the offset function the 5 EFI output
18. PLC Connection cable GOT Communica Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Series 2 1 Option device Model tion Type Connection diagram number distance GT 27 Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R20305 9S 3m or STARDOM RS 232 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC User RS 232 connection GT diagram 2 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Connect the connection cable to the port of the PLC 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 5 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 4 Connection diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable 1 Connection diagram a RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side 1 RD RXD 2 SD TXD 3 ER DTR 4 SG 5 DR DSR k RS RTS 7 CS CTS amp E 9 b RS 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD 1 ell gt RD RXD 2 is so SD TXD 3 2 RD ER DTR 4 56 5 5 sG DR DSR 6 amp 4 4 ER RS RTS 7 3 7 RS CS CTS 8 E gt CS 9 9 Shell _ 41 sher 1 Connect the shield to the housing of the connectors on both the GOT and YOKOGAWA product sides c RS 232 connection diagram 3 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR 56 DR DSR RS RTS
19. RS23C RS485 Terminating resistor 2200 interface converter Temperature controller Temperature controller f pu S AE A TETTEM 1 1 B 4 i r f SDB AC 3 SDA 54 i RDB d RDB La id RDA 1 RDA 5 n n i SG ri SG 5 GND 6 iiec 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name arrive SREB Mee Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 23 RDA 26 24 SG 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 6 RS 485 connection diagram 6 1 y 2 GOT side Eug e n A 5 Temperature SDA1 TXD1 6 l eo SDB SDB1 TXD1 8 gt SDA SDA2 TXD2 5 RDB SDB2 TXD2 7 E E RDA SG 2 C RP RDA1 RXD1 10 T EE RDB1 RXD1 12 RSA RTS 14 RSB RTS 16 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 11 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the mod
20. 4 controller side controller side 1 TXD gt TXD RXD RXD 1 1 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Terminating resistor should be provided outside for a interface converter which will be a terminal with the terminating switch turned OFF 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2 2 convener Temperature Temperature SI 30A 2 controller side controller side it E 1 SD RD i 7 1 1 SD RD H n m it GND P 3 2 3 5VIN 4 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 T 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be
21. h H COM2 COM PORT4 eS CE Front side Right side Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Communication 9600bps ON OFF speed 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps ON ON Communication protocol mosi ON MODBUS COM1 Communication 9600bps OFF speed COM2 19200bps ON Communication protocol Most ON OFF OFF COM2 MODBUS Dip switch settings valid OFF valid invalid 9 44 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Unit address setting switch COM Setting range 0 to L toD 4 Interval time settings Configure the interval time setting using the RKC communication setting tool WinPCI After the communication is started set as follows Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZCOM_rkc cfg Communication 1 interval time 0 to 250ms Communication 2 interval time For the using method of RKC communication setting tool refer to the following gt RKC communication setting tool user s manual 9 5 5 Connecting to CB Series 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Device address 1 to 99 m gt 2 9600bps Communication speed 3 19200bps 0 8 1 None
22. A Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable Connection cable PLC Cnet I F module GOT 1 2 fes Number of 3 connectable Cable model Cnet I F Commu Cable model Series Connection nication Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number ue Type diagram number GT 27 Built into GOT 558422 RS 422 K300S connection G4L CUEA RS 422 connection 500 3 31 PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 3 diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 12 6 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 12 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM GOT side PLC side CD 1 1 5 RD RXD 2 i 7 TXD2 SD TXD 3 4 RXD2 ER DTR 4 2 RXD1 SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 6 3 TXD1 RS RTS 7 5V CS CTS i 8 Sc NC 9 9 SG 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM PLC side cD 1 1 CD RD RXD 2 TXD SD TXD 3 2 RXD ER D
23. connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model equipment number number GT 27 Built into GOT 93 W BF 02 0500 0 5m a 5 E RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1m e RS 422 1200m connection diagram 1 GT controllers GT15 RS4 9S 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 8 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 3 Connecting to SRZ When connecting to temperature control module Z TIO Z CT with a converter Communication driver Ce RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Sma Connection cable 2 Connection cab Temperature Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Gable model Max Model Communication Cable mogel Max Connection mae Connection Swi Option device Model equipment distance name Type A distance diagram number diagram number GT 27 Z TIO Up to 16 Built into GOT EX oe Z CT Up to 16 895 485 4 RS 232 Z DIO Up to 16 SRZ connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m Total of Z TIO Z diagram 8 diagram 3 27 CT and Z DIO Up GT15 RS2 9P to 31 for 1 GOT 4 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd CONN
24. r Bit CH1 SIEMENS OP Ethernet Device Information v 00000 Kind Bale Cle at Range Gele Dee 000000 102397 o Ba Network OHost QG Other Network No 1 Station No 1 Cancel Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device settings of SIEMENS PLC S7 200 300 400 1200 series SIEMENS OP Ethernet 1 When setting a bit device as a bit device Set the device using the format of byte address DEC bit address 0 to 7 Device M 01287 Device number Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC 2 When setting a data register Set the device using the format of data block DB data word DW Device name Device DB 100 5 DBW 10000 Data word DW numb Data block DB numbe 3 Precautions when setting devices a Preparing to set a data register It is necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and sequence program before using a data register Setting more than one data block cannot be done for the data register b Object that cannot be set Timer current value T Only one device can be set for the write target of this device Therefore multiple devices such as using the recipe function etc cannot be used c Notation method of the data registers with the bit specification
25. 3 Station No switch LCO2 ON only Settings Rotary For RS For RS Sith Description 232 422 communi communi 9 6 87 1 Station No 0 0 STATIONNO D H 10 s digit 1 4 2 Station No 4 2 ET 1 s digit 7 2 11 Connecting to STARDOM Make the communication settings as shown below For details of the communication settings refer to the following manual Peripheral Software Manual for YOKOGAWA PLC Connection between STARDOM and the for communication settings For the communication settings of STARDOM STARDOM and the PC for communication settings must be connected to Ethernet using the Resource Configurator peripheral software COM port setting Make the settings on the FCX Maintenance Page for STARDOM 1 Select Reboot Maintenance Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the maintenance mode 2 Set the COM1 port driver to be used Execute JEROS Basic Setting File from the Edit System Setting File screen on the FCX Mainten ance Page Confirm that the line of Com1SioDriver is as follows Com1SioDriver DUONUS_SIO 3 Set the COM1 port to be used Execute COM1 Port Setting File from the Edit System Setting Files screen on the FCX Maintenance Page Make the settings as follows according to the communication specifications on the setting screen Leave the settings as default if not lis
26. PLC Connection cable GOT 5 232 485 5 ele interface ee able Mode Max Option device Model gt name Connection diagram number distance p equipment capsule Type O 2 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500 2 Built into GOT GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 1 GOT for up to 6 5 1205 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m PLCs RS 232C ui F140S FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m gt 15 5 en Z or 27 capsules 65 485 connection diagram 1 500 GT15 RS4 9S O 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 9 4 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs using general purpose interface modules Communication driver FUJI MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT Mn Commun Number of connectable Mogel RURE ication cable model Max Option device Model equipment name interface Type Connection diagram number distance p module 3 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 500m Built into GOT 1205 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m 1 GOT for F140S FFU120B RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m up fo 3TPECS general purpose or GT F150S T 27 interface modules E on diagram GT15 RS4 9S 4 Product manufactured by Fuj
27. Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 6 RS 485 connection diagram 6 intartaco Terminating resistor 1000 1 2 2 asc oy Temperature vee ape dE controller side E i eo E 1 E E Mag 8 1 x ba go 3 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminals 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 7 RS 485 connection diagram 7 ath Tempera
28. SDB 301 407 501 SDA 302 408 502 RDB 304 410 504 RDA 305 411 505 SG 303 409 503 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Fuel Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UT55A Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model With CH3 55 Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model With 4 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERAT
29. i 4 PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Cable model M Number of connectable Series Cnet I F module cation Connection diagram EMEN Option device Model equipment Type number GT 9 27 Built into GOT 93 0 a _ RS 232 CRS 232 connection 15m E diagram 1 GT 27 5 GT15 RS2 9P K80S lt 1 PLC for 1 GOT c K120S ud 27 2 Built into GOT 93 2 G7L CUEB Rs 232 895 232 connection 5 N diagram 2 GT a 27 GT15 RS2 9P 2 51 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 2 O 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 12 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs n Connection cable 2 12 4 Connection cable 1 Connection cable E Connection cable PLC Cnet I F module GOT 1 2 NEK Number of Cable model Commu Cable model m connectable Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number Type diagram number GT 27 Built into GOT 93 k8os 089795422 Use RS 422 ane connection G7L CUEC RS 422 connection 500m 3 31 PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 3 diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS
30. Output relay P Q0 to Q77 2 Bit memory to M655357 o i Bit memory M MO to M317 Decimal Specified bit of the following gt special memory SM SMO to SM1947 word devices Except W oO 1 Word device bit variable memory Input Timer T TURO 1259 relay Output relay Bit Counter CO to C255 memory Timer Counter o sequence control relay S S0 to S317 variable memory VW VWO to VW10238 variable memory VW VWO to VW5118 Input relay IW IWO to 65534 Lr Input relay IW IWO to IW6 Output relay QW QWO to QW65534 Output relay QW QWO to QW6 Bit memory MW MWO to MW65534 E analog input aiw AIWO to AIW30 Timer T 124 TO to T65535 g analog output AQW 3 AQWO to AQW30 8 Counter C 124 CO to C65535 z Bit memory MW MWO to MW30 5 DB1 DBWO to 2 22 Decimal DB1 DBW65534 o p special memory SMW SMWO to SMW192 o i TO to T255 DB2 DBWO to Timer T DB2 DBW65534 Counter C CO to C255 Data register DB High speed counter 2 HCO to HC2 DB4094 DBWO to sequence control relay DB4094 DBW65534 SW DB4095 DBWO to DB4095 DBW65534 q Data format to input into Timer T Counter C varies according to a type of the PLC 3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running 4 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 57 300 400 BCD code 57 200 BIN code 2 5 1200 does not support Timer T Counte
31. User RS 485 H 1200 1 FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m X TIO Up to 31 SRX RS 485 conne ciom dagran FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m Total of X TIO X DI and Up to 31 for 1 GOT GT 27 ser 1200 GT15 RS4 TE connection diagram 7 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 26 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 10 Connecting to SB1 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers TIT RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 l O 2 2 T t p Connection cable 1 GOT E controller Me Number of mega Cable model distance cation Option device Model equipment z name Connection diagram number Type H GT 27 9 G8 RS 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT 4 e Z FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 27 SB1 RS 485 G8 RS 485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1 23 h 1GOT k FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2 m 2 GT z 27 G8 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the p
32. eene eene 14 17 14 43 SIEMENS 5 Ethernet if t gie I o P etd iege eie de reed 14 17 14 4 4 SIEMENS OP 14 17 REVISIONS WARRANTY 15 List of Manuals for GT Works3 For the manuals related to this product install the manuals with the drawing software If you need a printed manual consult your local Mitsubishi representative or branch office List of Manuals for GT Designer3 GOT2000 1 Screen drawing software manuals Manual name GT Works3 1 Installation Procedure Manual Manual number Model code GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH 080862ENG 1D7MB2 GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 2 Connection manuals SH 081228ENG Manual name GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Version1 Manual number Model code SH 081197ENG 1D7MJ8 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 Version1 SH 081198ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 Version1 SH 081199ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Version1 SH 081200ENG 3 GT SoftGOT2000 manuals Manual name GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual 4 GOT2000 manuals Manual number Mod
33. 1 gt lt 72 When using the sound output unit or external I O unit The sound output unit or external I O unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example When installing a sound output unit Communication Sound output unit Communication unit Sound output unit 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 17 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or 1 18 multimedia unit Install the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit at the 1st stage of the extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage When any of these units is used the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the extension interface Model Communication unit Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE controller network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Example When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET H communication unit NETH Von lon gt gt Video RGB Video RGB input unit MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET H 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1
34. switches Character configuration Ay switches Terminator switch Front view Rear view 1 Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch 1 8992 483898195 pw E MODE switch MODE Switch position Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence 3 format 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 15 4 5 PLC Side Setting 2 Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 station No switches Station No 0 to 99 ADDRESS 3 Connecting terminating resistors Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch EI 4 Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration Switches 1 oj oj o ojo N de OI ON lt Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps ON speed 192006 ON ON 1bit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF Tbits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing method By switch ON 4 16 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 5 PLC Side Setting 4 5 3 Connecting to FFU120B Communication settin
35. 9 9 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 4 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector supporting the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual 3 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC side SDA 1 ooo gt 2 RD H RDA 2 3 SD H RSA 3 6 CSA 4 lt i 7 ATT H 36 5 5 SG SDB 6 gt 1 RD L RDB 7 4 SDL RSB 8 8 55 5052 CSB 9 9 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 4 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT For the procedure to set the terminating re
36. AA ES Oe _ lu 4 L s i 1 ks ea 2 Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 21 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication Settings of the Utility Channel number of communication interface communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 57 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 1 1 After powering up the GOT touch GOT basic 1 set Controller from the Utility Utility main m nu 2 GOT basic set func set Maintenance Monitor Data control 2 The Communication Settings appears 3 Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication Standard I F Setting Channel Driver assign interface box to be used ChNo ChNo USB 1 QJ7 1024 9 Host Extend I F Setting 4 When the communication driver name is not Extend 1 1 Extend 1 2 displayed normally carry out the following 1st None ChNo None 0 None 0 None procedure again 2nd CHo None Chio None L 1 1Setting the Communication Interface 0 None 0 None
37. Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Setting 2 wire 4 wire 2 2 wire type or 4 wire type Terminating resistor With Without Echo back OFF RS 485 driver active control AUTO 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Refer to the following connection diagram for setting C 8 3 2 RS 485 cable Settings by switch RINY EW a 3201s T 2 2 2400ips a 4800 gt Timer change over time Uca Rotary switch EB pacana RE i Communication setting DIP SW 1 Settings of the setting 2 wire 4 wire the RS 485 driver active control the terminating resistor the echo back Make those settings by operating the communication setting DIP SW Set Switch position Setting item value 4 2 3 415 6 4 WIS OFF OFF type Setting 2 wire 4 wire 2 wire ON ON type RS 485 driver active control AUTO OFF cn with ON Terminating resistor without OFF Echo back OFF OFF 2 A setting of the transmission speed Make this setting by operating the timer change over time Rotary switch Switch position Transmission speed 2 Soke ees 5 9600bps 4 6 192006 f 5925 7 38400bps 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Co
38. destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 8 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 7 16 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 2 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 8 Controller Setting QFOHT YORUGAW Ee Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type YOKOGAWA STARDOM FASOQ FA M3 x Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with list of lowerls 3 Gateway Standard I F Ethernet Multi x p Communication B Gateway Serve Ethemet YOKOGAWA Gateway x 28 Gateway Clent E Mai FTP Server Transfer
39. Bit CH1 HITACHI HIDIC H 5 Device Information Of 0000 Kind elle fleks 4156 lt Remote 11213 Device 0000 5A95 Dc Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Device 2 12 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set Device settings of HITACHI IES PLC 1 When specifying an external I O device a When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of module No slot No module bit No Device Of 5 95 Device number Module internal bit No 00 95 DEC Device name Slot No 0 A HEX Module No 0 5 DEC b When setting a word device Set the device using the format of module No slot No module bit No For the device name setting enter w before the bit device name Device WX 0 000 Device number Module internal bit No 0 7 DEC Device name Slot No 0 A HEX Module No 0 5 DEC 2 When specifying a remote external I O device a When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of remote master station remote slave station slot No module bit No lt O z E 2 2 O
40. Gable modai Max connectable Series HMI Adapter nication Connection diagram distance Option device Model equipment Type number GT 27 Ever GT GT09 C30R20801 98 Built into GOT 23 3m SIMATIC MLFB RS 232 or 15m 1 GOT for 1 HMI 57 300 400 6 57 972 0 11 0 0 Adapter RS232 connection 27 diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 14 2 Serial Connection 2 E 2 O z E 2 2 o 14 2 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 Communication driver SIEMENS 57 200 pu Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Em T Number of connectable icati a 29 E Max distance Option device Model equipment on Type Connection diagram number Built into GOT l 71 SIMATIC 57 200 RS 232 iin 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Siemens For details of this product contact Siemens AG 14 4 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable 1 Connection diagram a RS232 connection d
41. MicroLogix1200 1762 L24BWA RS 232 MicroLogix1500 10 2 1764 LSP RS 232 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model List C37 10 2 2 Series Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable model Refer to ControlLogix 1756 L 1756 11 1 1756 11 2 1756 11 3 1756 161 1756 L62 1756 1 63 1756 L55M12 1756 L55M13 1756 L55M14 1756 L55M16 1756 L55M22 1756 L55M23 1756 L55M24 RS 232 Ethernet GT 27 23 C 37 10 2 3 C 37 10 3 1 CompactLogix 1769 L31 1769 1 32 1769 L32C 1769 L35E 1769 L35CR RS 232 Ethernet C 2 10 2 3 C 3 10 3 1 1756 1725 Ethernet C 37 10 3 1 FlexLogix 1794 L33 1794 L34 RS 232 C 3 102 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model List 10 3 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series When connecting to one PLC Connection cable Communication driver AB SLC500 AB 1 For 6716 6715 GT14 6712 GT11 PLC Connection cable GOT a 9 Number
42. 2 Selectthe unit address without overlapping with that of other units 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed communication mode data length parity bit and stop bit COM PORT3 COM PORT1 COM PORT2 COM PORT1 COM PORT2 setting switch SW2 TEE Co 8796762 setting switch SW3 a o ET Right side 1 Transmission speed settings COM PORT1 COM PORT2 Sw2 Communication speed 3 4 OFF OFF 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps b COM PORT3 SW3 Communication speed 3 4 OFF OFF 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps 9 41 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting l E 2 O Z 2 a E o Y 14 Z E 2 2 O 2 Communication mode settings 9 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A H a COM PORT1 COM PORT2 PCP B Sw2 5 6 8 Communication protocol Communication settings ON OFF OFF OFF MODBUS protocol Make the communication settings of the temperature controller b COM PORT3 Item Setting range SwE Tu issi 9600bps 192006 Communication protocol Transmission speed ps ps Data bit 8bits ON MODBUS protocol Parity bit None Unit address 2 0 to F 3 Settings o
43. Communication settings ll Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting Make the communication settings by operating the DIP Switches Switch of the temperature controller Item Set value Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Terminati ist i i ermina mg resistor ON OFF Data bit 8bits selection Parity bit Odd even none 1 Set as necessary Stop bit 1bit Settings by switch Communication Type RS 232C RS 485 Echo back Without RS 485 1 Make the same setting as that of GOT side Settings by DIP switch _ Communication A setting switch SG RDA SDA 7 9 Terminal block o oo for RS 422 485 communication 808 08 i PWR RD SD OOOO 29 switch omron K3SC 10 M n INTERFACE CONVERTER RS 232C Front Rear 1 Settings of transmission speed and terminating Terminal block resistor selection for RS 232 communication 4 uj 2 E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O 2 E 2 2 O Switch Setting item Set value 1 2 3 42 5 6 7 8 Front of K3SC 10 body Inside of K3SC 10 body T When removing the front cover ransmission 9600bps ON OFF ON Speed 1 Transmission speed settings
44. Connection cable Mop Hr PLC Connection cable GOT Communication Cable model Number of connectable Model name ES Connection diagram Max distance Option device Model equipment um number GT 27 ae Built into GOT 93 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD412 RS 232 e RS 232 connection 15m 9 IC200UDR001 diagram 2 3E 1200408002 ul IC200UDRO003 A o IC200UALO04 z IC200UAL005 27 IC200UALO06 Built into GOT EA 1 PLC for 1 GOT IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 12004009110 2 IC200UDD120 O IC200UDD212 RS 232 e RS 232 connection 15m 1200408005 diagram 2 1200408006 ere IC200UDRO10 DE IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDRO64 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 7 11 2 System Configuration For the RS 422 connection E ERRER FERREE 22181818188 1188818181 EJCTSISISISISTS FERREE BEERE 11818818 181818818 STSISTSIS S CEREREA i PLC Connection cable Connection cable GOT PLC IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 IC200UAR028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212
45. 2 Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit 4 5 2 Connecting to NC1L RS4 Parity bit Initializing method For the NVIL RS2 For the NC1L RS2 Communication settings oN lt al Make the communication settings using setting L 8 ol switches Ofe Item Set value 4 D BH Command setting type start stop 3 3 MODE 2 Bl synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps ON Data bit 8bits or 7bits Switch No WE Even or Odd Setting item Set value Parity bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Done None Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON Stop bit 1bit 2bits speed 192006 OFF ON ON Initializing method By switch bit ON i 0 to 99 Stop bit Station No a 208 Terminating resistor ON or OFF 5 Data bit a 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 8bits OFF 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Even ON 3 ON the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal Z Parity bit 5 LE RE Settings by switch initializing Make the communication settings using each setting 2 method By switch ou switch 2 554 f 9 RS 485 station
46. Backup work register LXW LXW0000 to LXW3FFF Long word work register LLL LLLOOOO to LLL1FFF Backup Long word work register LML S 4 LMLO0000 to LML1FFF Floating point work register LF LF0000 to LF1FFF Backup single precision floating point work register LG 160000 to LG1FFF 1 Only reading is possible 2 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 3 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 4 When it is used with bit specification bit specification of word device the offset function cannot be used 5 When bit specification bit specification of word device is performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Higher Lower Device No represen tation Hexadec imal 50 b1 as b14 b15 6 Device GL corresponds to device G of the PLC 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set ha lt E O z E 2 2 O 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable 115 1 4 2 4 2 System 4 3 4 3 Connection Diagram 4 11 4 4 GOT Side 4 13 4 5 PLC Side 4 14 4 6 Device Range that Can
47. F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP22 0S F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 FA M3V FA500 F3SP76 7S 500 5 232 5 422 5 232 5 422 737724 7977 22 STARDOM NFCP100 NFJT100 RS 232 737723 F3SP05 F3SP08 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 FA M3V F3SP71 4N Ethernet 37 7 3 1 F3SP76 7S 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 Connectable Model List 7 2 Connection 7 22 1 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V When using the conversion cable Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable 3 SIO port adapter cable 4 Including the length of the CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable or the SIO port adapter cable PLC Connection cable GOT oe umber Model Conversion Prem Cable model Max Ed connectable 5 ecd 3 n cable pw Connection diagram number distance equipment Type F3SP05 F3SP08 27 F3SP21 Built into GOT 93 F3S
48. G88 RS 232 connection diagram 1 5 GT15 RS2 9P 2 2 1 GOT for 1 PLC o 27 Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R20202 15P 3m 22 Gs RS 232 connection diagram 2 GT15 RS2 9P GT 27 Built into GOT 93 CP 9300MS GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m Paras i puse B GT compatible Ga RS 232 connection diagram 3 27 GT15 RS2 9P 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 5 6 2 Serial Connection PLC Connection cable GOT Communica muni able model Max Model name tion caus eae Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance module Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m RS 232 or same as above CT GsaRS 232 connection diagram 1 27 GT15 RS2 9P 2171 connecting to 2171F Built into GOT same as RS 422 RHRS 422 connection diagram 2 above GT15 RS4 0S Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 communicati on module 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 4 System configuration for connecting to MP 940 Communication driver Loom YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Number of connectable Model bl del Max 25 O
49. RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 4 GOT Side Settings 9 4 1 Setting communication p 9 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication ng Qc settings Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS 9600 E Data Bit 8 bit LE 2 Stop Bit 1 bit Control Setting o Controller Settin E Parity None GNE mam Retry Times 0 i Standard 5232 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 p Communication a Delay Time ms 0 2 Ecc ME Format 1 a 18 Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS 5 XD Station No Switch ares P gt 4 Item Description Range Lu 96006 Set this item when change the transmission pass cad m pest tee Transmissio speed used for communication with the tne Speed connected equipment anata c 1 Default 9600b Defan ps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used gt Data Bit for with the connected 7bits 8bits equipment SS Default 8bits m Set this item when change the data length used z Stop Bit for communication with the connected 4bit 2bits z equipment Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity 1 Parit check and how
50. When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485V Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Qc l O Qc Connection cable 3 E 2 a 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cab lt Te t ti ti Interface emperature Connection cable Connectioncable 3 controller 1 2 Max converter Number of Cable model Cable model oen Commu Cable model Max connectable Model distance Model i EG Connection Connection i nication Connection dista an Model equipment device diagram number diagram number Type diagram number nce 4 Built into W BF 02 0500 GOT 0 5 RS 485 2 connection 1200m CD485N RS 232 5 232 connection 15m W BF 02 1000 1m i 2 di 3 en W BF 02 3000 3m 21 GT15 RS2 9P Up to 31 1 temperature GT controllers 27 Built into gg for Tor GOT 23 preparing RS 485 connection diagram 8 1200m CD485 V RS 232 5 232 15m diagram 3 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 25 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 9 Connection to SRX When connecting to temperature cont
51. 1 7 3 Ioue p 1 11 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the 1 12 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the 1 12 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing ON 1 13 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 14 1 31 Communication 1 14 1 3 2 Option teta liat 1 15 1 3 3 lt lt Ert Ue epe P ded 1 15 1 3 4 Serial multi drop connection 1 15 1 3 5 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position 1 16 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 19 1 4 1 connector 1 19 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection 2 1 20 1 4 8 Terminating resistors Of 1 21 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected 1 22 1 6 Checking for Normal 0 1 24 TET Check onthe GO Tiii om ente Rr e ERR ue Ea dd 1 24 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet
52. 2 E 2 2 O 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 1 FUJI temperature controller For details of FUJI temperature controller refer to the following manual lt gt User s Manual of the FUJI temperature controller 2 Interface converter For details on communication settings of the interface converter refer to the following manual 5 User s Manual of interface converter 5 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 or PXG9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 RS 485 communication settings Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits fixed Model name Refer to 4 1 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 eae Parity bit Even Odd None PXR9 as Stop bit 1bit fixed Temperature controller PXGA PXG5 PXG9 5 5 2 Station No 2 1to 255 PXH9 5 5 3 Communication Read only permission or read and overwrite RC 77 5 5 4 permissions 3 permission SI 30A 5 5 5 5 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Interface converter 2 r KS 485 5 5 6 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units K3SC 10 5 5 7 3 Set as necessary 5 5 1 Connecting to PXR3 4 5 9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader communication Item Set value Transm
53. Built into GOT 23 diagram 5 5 FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 27 ser 1 RS SS connection 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL 40 1m 93 diagram 6 4 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m GT 27 ser 5 485 connection 1200m GT15 RS4 TE diagram 7 Communication driver Cem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Number of connectable equipment Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 19 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration l E 2 O 2 3 a E o Y D 2 E 2 2 O 9 2 7 Connection to PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 RMC500 MA900 901 AG500 SA100 200 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver Cem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 tempe ature Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Ma Number of X Commun Cable model Cable model connectable Model AA 3 distance y name ication Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment Type number number PF900 PF901 Built into GOT HA400 HA401 RS 232 Ass R
54. CS CTS 7 6 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 97 1 4 1 connector specifications c YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram a RS 422 connection diagram 1 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side RDA 2 fe SDB RDB 7 6 SDA SDA 1 RDB SDB 6 gt RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 4 9 lt SG 5 k SG SHIELD b RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side RDA 2 SDB RDB 7 i SDA SDA 1 RDB SDB 6 RDA RSA 3 RSB 8 CSA 4 CSB 9 6 5 gt SG FG FG 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1 connector specifications c YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connect
55. Device x 45 9995 Device number Module bit No 00 95 DEC Slot No 0 9 DEC Remote slave station 0 9 DEC Remote master station 1 4 DEC Device name b When setting a word device Set the device using the format of remote master station remote slave station slot No module bit No For the device name setting enter w before the bit device name Device Wx 4 997 Device number L Module bit No 0 9 DEC Device name Slot No 0 9 DEC Remote slave station 0 9 DEC Remote master station 1 4 DEC 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 13 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 2 6 1 HITACHI HIDIC Series Device name Setting range Device No representation External input X 00000 to X05A95 Hexadecimal Decimal External output Y Y00000 to YO5A95 Remote external input X X10000 to X49995 Decimal Remote external output Y Y10000 to Y49995 1st CPU link L L0000 to L3FFF 2nd CPU link L1 L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal Data area M M0000 to M3FFF On delay timer TD TDO to TD255 Single shot timer SS 550 to 55255 8 Watchdog timer WDT WDTO to WDT255 Monostable timer 6 MSO to MS255 m Decimal Retentive timer TMRO to TMR255 Up counter CUO to CU511 Ring counter RCU RCUO to RCU511 Up Down counter CT CTO to CT511 Bi
56. GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Wireless LAN communication unit GT25 WLAN Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15 PRN Video input unit GT27 V4 Z A set of GT16M V4 and GT27 IF 1000 RGB input unit Video RGB unit GT27 R2 Z A set of GT16M R2 and GT27 IF 1000 Video RGB input unit GT27 V4R1 Z A set of GT16M V4R1 and GT27 IF 1000 RGB output unit GT27 ROUT Z A set of GT16M ROUT and GT27 IF 1000 Multimedia unit GT27 MMR Z A set of GT16M MMR and GT27 IF1000 Video signal conversion unit GT27 IF 1000 External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT B4 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Battery GT11 50BAT GT11 BAT GT25 12PSGC GT25 10PSGC GT25 08PSGC GT25 12PSCC GT25 For GT27 10PSCC GT25 08PSCC GT25 12PSCC UC GT25 10PSCC UC GT25 Protective sheet 08 5 For GT23 GT25 10PSCC UC GT25 08PSCC UC Protective cover for oil USB environmental protection cover GT20 10PCO GT20 08PCO GT25 UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND GT15 60STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 Attac
57. Produc commu with the open network port of RS 485 nication 4 wire type 2 wire type Produc with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model Other than 3 Produc 4 wire without the additional contact output points DO and with the open network port of RS 485 communication type 2 wire type Standard code model With CH3 Produc model with RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code With C4 Produci codem with the RS 485 communica h wire type specified in the E4 terminal ode ion port 4 wire type 2 area option Detailed Without LP Produci with two RS 485 communica ion ports 4 wire type and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor 1or2 With LP Produci with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and with the power supp for 24VDC sensor Produci with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With C4 Produci codem with the RS 485 communica wire type specified in the E4 terminal odel ion port 4 wire type 2 area option Detailed With LP Produci 2 wire type and with the power supp 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type
58. STORE Sets the input relay offset 2 0006 Source 00000 5 NL 2 Dest 0 00009 r rH STORE 1 5 the input register offset 0007 Source 00000 Dest DW00010 LH STORE the holding register offset 2 0008 Source 00000 Dest DW00011 0009 STORE Write range LO 3 0009 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00012 Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 21 6 3 Ethernet Connection 0010 0010 NL 2 0011 0011 NL 2 0012 0012 NL 2 0013 0013 NL 2 0014 0014 NL 1 0015 0015 NL 1 0016 0017 NL 1 0017 0018 NL 1 0018 0019 NL 2 0019 0020 NL 2 010740 0021 NL 1 6 22 STORE Source 0000065534 Dest DW00013 STORE Source 00000 AJ Dest DW00014 H STORE Source 00000 Dest DWO00024 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00025 ENDIF SB000004 DB000400 2 oat Execute 5 000004 MSG RCV Busy 08000210 Abort 08000400 Complete 0 000211 Dev Typ 00006 5 Error DB000212 Pro Typ 00001 Cir No 00001 Ch No 00002 4 Param DA00000 DB000211 true INC A IF Dest DW00024 END IF IF DB000212 true 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Write range HI B Clears the system registers Clears the no
59. Z E 2 2 O 9 2 4 Connecting to CB Series 100 CB400 500 700 900 When using the converter Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 998 Connection cable 1 Temperature P Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model T TCR EA Cable model us connectable Series Connection diagram 5 Connection diagram Option device Model equipment distance name ation Type distance number number Built into GOT Up to 31 Gse RS 485 55 232 temperature connection diagram 1200 CD485 V 5 232 connection diagram 15m controllers 8 3 GT 27 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 12 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT 2 CD Em 7 Number of connectable communication able model Series pes Option device Model equipment Type Connection diagram number distance 2 RS 485 conn
60. 1 1 ri E SG 9 E Wy i eE pe FG 10 2 T 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series EM Ms UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 SG 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 11 RS 485 connection diagram 11 Terminating resistor 100Q GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller RXe 1 SDA1 TXD1 6 4 3 i E 3 RX c RX rt SDB1 TXD1 8 5 5 RX TX 11 pa RDA1 RXD1 10 4 4 ne i H RDB1 RXD1 12 6 TX SG Li 5 2 2 2 56 Ca IHRE x RSA RTS 14 T 5 RSB RTS 16 Bl O CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 lt RDB2 RXD2 11 gt 13 NC 15 17 NC 19 gt O 51 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature co
61. 2 2 gt E lt lt o x gt 2 E o 2 2 9 7 Precautions Station number settings of temperature controller In the system configuration the temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 57 8 4 2 Communication detail settings GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 8 34 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 Precautions CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable 9 2 9 2 System 9 4 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 30 94 GOT Side 5 9 39 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 41 9 6 Device Range that Be Set 9 5
62. 5 232 15 controllers for 1 connection diagram 1 GT GOT 9 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation When connecting directly Communication driver UT YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT CET m n Number of connectable ommunic able mode ax i Series me Option device Model equipment ation Type Connection diagram number distance FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m 23 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 1 85 485 connection diagram 7 42090m 2 wire type Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT UT100 RS 485 GT 27 55 485 connection diagram 10 2 wire type 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 8 2 System Configuration 4 l 2 ra E z O o a 2 5 n E lt gt lt o x gt O z E o 2 2 O o 8 2 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series When using the RS232C RS485 conv
63. 6 to LONG 11 14 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 5 PLC Side Setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station No 3 No 00 No 15 No 6 TeTererereren TeTe eTereren IEEE TeTe erereren 15 15 1 slelelelelel 15 TI t Examples of station number setting m 9 598 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Specification range 00 to 31 PLC Station No settings Make sure to set a 2 digit number for the station No of the PLC to be monitored by the GOT 11 6 Device Range that Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows 11 6 1 GE Series 90 Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that be set in GT Designers Informati Displays the device type and setting
64. C 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RDA2 7 RDB2 SG 9 1 FG 10 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM e Connecting terminating resistors 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 23 Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 33 9 3 Connection Diagram 5 RS 485 connection diagram 5 GOT side SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature controller controller controller controller 4 __ 4 _ 5 24 TIR A TIR A ta TIR A TIR A TIR B TIR B 1 TR SG SG P2 11 56 SG m am TN VE iE ELE Combination module 48 Combination module Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W 8 More than 1000 in case of CB series 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When usi
65. Communication 38400 8 1bit mode 5 bps x S Communication 57600 8bit E 1bit mode 6 bps ve Communication 57600 mode 7 bps bits None 1bit Communication 115200 Bbits Even 1bit mode 8 bps Communication 115200 Bbits Nono 1bit mode 9 bps Set the following when using the CPU programming port as the PC link function Make the checksum setting according to the sum check setting on the GOT side For the sum check setting on the GOT side refer to the following CPU PC link 7 2 5 Setting communication interface function Communication settings settings Item Set value Use of PC link function Mark Use enabled Checksum Mark Do not mark OFF Protect function Do not mark OFF 1 The communication mode that can be selected differs according to the CPU 7 10 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N With right side cover removed 1 Transmission speed setting switch Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT si
66. For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help r n Communicate with GOT El cot 214171 cor Read verification L1 GOT GOT Information Get GOT Information Read Data E GOT Type Source Drive C Buit in Fash Memory GOT Name Free Space Capacity KB ia Destination GT Designer3 4 GOT Read Communication Configuration Communication Path PC USB GOT Close 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Read tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Drive information radio button of the Read Data 4 Click the Info Reception button 5 Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 13 o a 2 gt x O o 7 gt a ir amp lt 7 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type For the specifications usage and connecting procedure on option devices re
67. GOT Default Oms Specify whether to use the station No during communication Station If Yes is selected the station No is Yes or No Selection fixed to 0 Default Yes 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 4 GOT Side Settings 2 5 PLC Side Setting POINT 2 For transmission control procedure2 Item Set value HITACHI IES PLC Transmission speed 19200bps For details of the HITACHI IES PLC refer to the BRUN following manual i Data bit Tbit zl gt HITACHI IES PLC user s Manual Stop bit 1bit o Parity bit Even Directly connecting to the CPU Control Method None c For RS 232 communication lt ER ue Communication format 292 MODE switch 9 1 2 3 4800bps 9600bps For RS 422 communication lt Transmissionspeed 19200bps 38400bps RS 422 MODE switch 9 o Station No 0 Sum check Done z Data bit 7bit Stop bit 1bit k 4 Parity bit Even gt Control Method DTR contro
68. Word device bit following word devices g Word device bit following word devices Input relay IW IWO to IW510 Data register Output relay QW QW0 to QW510 relay W IVO to TW T26 Bit memory MW MWO to MW2046 Output relay QW QWO to QW126 Bit memory MW MWO to MW254 Timer Current value T TO to T511 y MW Counter Current value Timer Current value T CO to C511 Counter Current value C CO to C255 8 DB1 DBWO to 8 Del DEW US 5 DB1 DBW65534 9 Decimal a DB2 DBWO t Decimal p DB2 DBWO to p 2 DB2 DBW2046 DB2 DBW65534 Data register DB Data register DB DB254 DBWO to DB4094 DBW65534 DB255 DBWO to DB4095 DBWO to DB255 DBW2046 Dee BENDS 1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 14 4 4 SIEMENS OP Ethernet 1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 14 4 2 SIEMENS 57 200 Series 1 Only reading is possible 2 Onlyreading 32 bit two word data designation is allowed Device Device d 5 Device name Setting range Device name Setting range represen represen tation tation variable memory V VO to V102397 variable memory V VO to V51197 Input relay 1 10 to 1655357 Input relay 1 ae Output relay 00 to 0655357
69. nnns tenere nnn 7 22 7 4 1 YOKOGAWA FA500 FA MS 5 7 23 7 4 2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA MS Series 7 23 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 Connectable Modell Elst 5 5 REGERE anny 8 2 8 2 System Configuration 8 3 8 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series traen doe ttn ede a nana 8 3 8 2 2 Connecting to UT100 Series 21 2 4 4 0 2 4 8 5 8 2 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 4 0 1 netten denn tette denne ttn ne annt nn 8 6 8 2 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced 5 8 8 8 3 Connection Diagram dace dete tiere eie e ed e edd nn de a nn eta daa 8 12 8 31 232 te Dalee er eh 8 12 8 3 2 55485 m eR MIU 8 13 9 4 GOT Side Settings eee ER eue RE aia ies 8 27 8 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 8 27 8 4 Communication detail 8 27 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting enne 8 29 8 5 1 Connecting to GREEN seriosi
70. 028 Logic result LQ LQ0 0 1037 Decimal 32 03 1 2 03 3 035 036 037 038 Logic input LI 00 to 13 7 48 Q4 1 042 04 3 04 4 045 46 Q4 7 048 Word device bit Specified bit of the 64 05 1 052 053 05 4 055 056 57 058 following word devices 80 064 06 2 063 06 4 06 5 66 06 7 068 Fixedtoo Data byte D DO to 099 Dedma 96 Q7 1 Q7 2 Q7 3 Q7 4 Q7 5 Q7 6 Q7 7 Q7 8 OFF Data word W WO to W49 112 08 1 2 08 3 Q amp 5 08 6 087 88 4 Decima 128 09 1 09 2 093 Q9 4 Q9 5 096 097 09 8 2 EFI input byte El EI110 to E1233 Decimal 144 0104 010 2 a10 3 010 4 010 5 0106 0107 0108 5 Decimal 160 911 2 9113 0115 0116 0117 911 8 5 EFI output byte EQ Sean ds ED Decima 176 0121 912 2 012 3 012 4 912 5 012 6 0127 0128 Decimal 192 Device range error Logic input byte LD LDO to LD3 Decima c Logic result LQ Logic input word LW LWO to LW1 Decima Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 100 0 1004 190 2 1003 190 4 1005 1006 190 7 8 1010 1011 1012 1013 Lats Late 1017 16 102 0 19241 102 2 La23 1024 1025 1026 1027 24 1030 La3 1 103 2 La3 3 193 4 1035 1036 1037 Device of SICK Flexi Soft ae Only reading is possible for all devices d Logic input LI Offset 0 1 2 3 4
71. 192 168 001 073 Address for CP 717 Node ON The module starts the self Port 05016 05017 21001 diagnosis when the PLC is tarted Connection 2 Test ns TCP TCP UDP TESES 198 OFF The module does not start the self diagnosis when the PLC Protocol Extended Extended Extended is started Type MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MEMOBUS Code BIN BIN BIN 1 Turn off all the unused switches Transmission Be sure to set the values above for the address so that the GOT communicates with the programmable controller correctly For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 6 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 Settings for CP 218IF Item IP Address Set value IP address for 218TXB Response Time Not required parameter ount of Retr Number of m Not required Connection Number 1 Local Port 10500 Node IP Address Local IP address of GOT Connection Node Port Local port No of GOT parameter setting Connection Type UDP Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS Code BIN Node Name Any string 6 24 When even one of those switches is on the PLC may not normally operate When the PLC is started with the TEST switch on the module starts the self diagnosis and may not perform the communication Turn off the switch before the communication is started 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Sequence program To communicate
72. 2 E D O z E 2 2 O 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 7 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 7 Connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 Communication settings Set the communication settings of PLC and PC PPI cable 1 PLC settings Set the communication settings of PLC by operating the SIEMENS programming tool STEP7 WIN32 Setting item PLC Side Setting Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed Host address 11031 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Set the address without overlapping the address of other units 2 PC PPI cable settings Set the transmission speed by operating the DIP switch on the PC PPI cable DIP switch down side 0 upper side 1 RS 232 PC PPI cable SWITCH 123 RS 485 57 200 CPU 000000000000 SWITCH 4 SWITCH 5 s 65555555555 Transmission speed 19200bps 0 1 0 0 0 9600bps 1 1 Adjust with GOT settings 14 8 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 8 Precautions GOT alarm list system alarm function Error information cannot be monitored when the GOT is connected to a SIEMENS PLC The error information on the PLC CPU side can be monitored For details on the alarm list system alarm refer to the fo
73. 3 4 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Model UT55A Product Suffix code Optional suffix code condition A Function Open network Remark Product with the open network port of RS485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type B 1or2 Without LP Product with two RS485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UP55A Other than 3 1 Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open network port of RS485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With CH3 Product with the RS485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With C4 Product with the RS485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model Terminating res Set the termina 37 Connecting terminating resistors Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line istor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal ing resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal RS 485 connection diagram 9 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 9 RS232C RS485 interface converter Temp
74. 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 0 Definition of ChNo 0 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK 1 device connection 9 connection 1 22 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Utility 1 How to display Utility at default Utility call key 1 point press on GOT screen upper left corner Utility display Y T 2 Utility call When setting Pressing time to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds For the setting of the utility call key refer to the following gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective o 2 gt z o 52 2 a rd 3 a Y 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 23 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 1 Check on the GOT Check for er
75. 9 kt RET GND For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s i Jj SG 5 9 TX manual 1 FG e 10 RX RS i E RS 422 cable 11 Sending side termination 1 Connection diagram 12 RS 422 connection diagram 1 13 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side Da RDA 2 lt p 2 SDA RDB 7 12 SDB 4 RS 422 connection diagram 4 SDA 1 h RDA GOT side YASKAWA PLC side a SDB 6 gt 6 RDB RDA 2 led fur 5 Rsa 3 H p 1 PGND 7 TX g Receiving side termination SDA 1 RX 2 Sending side CSA 4 us termination SDB 6 RX c CSB 9 1 7 5 RSA 3 SG 5 RSB 8 LU RX 5 FG ee csa a le RXR m RS 422 connection diagram 2 CSB 9 2 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side SG 5 GND RDA 2 le FG RX RDB 7 Pa 5 TX SR 1 1 SDA 1 H i 2 RX H 1 RX vec RSA 3 3 Te 1 1 RSB Am 6 TXR i 1 Connect RXR with RX TXR with TX 2171 01 CSA 4 4 RXR and insert the terminating resistor CSB 9 1 SG 5 i FG 4 EEUU DE TENTI J 1 The terminating resistor 120 Q is valid by connecting pin 1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC side 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 11 6 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length o
76. CN1 MODU CN2 CN2 1 Settings of the channel No and the protocol TRE CAL a CN1 eer MODU 9 1 7338 J qr A 2 a m EL 9 CN2 3 17 MODU 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 7 3 5 PLC Side Setting 3 6 Device Range that Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 HITACHI S10mini S10V MESS Device Information x 000 Kind ann rnm 47516 allelic 2 000 FFF 0 d Item Information Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are Information selected in Device 1 The uppermost bit is 50 and the lowermost bit is b15 De
77. Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property GOT Net No GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5016 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range GOT Net No Set the network No of the GOT 110239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S W communication port No transparent port No 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 7 j Ser connection with the Ethernet 5014 1003934 Communication mod le Except for 5011 Port No Default 5016 5012 5013 and 49153 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry m 0 to 5times When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU 2 10299866 Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 90sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the Delay Time load of the network destination PLC 0 to 10000 10ms Default Oms 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communicati
78. Data bit configuration 6 8 1 Even 7 8 1 Odd Interval time 0 to 150 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the CB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following LF CB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 6 Connecting to FB Series 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Communication protocol 1 MODBUS Device address 1 to 99 Slave address 2 96 9600bps Communication speed 19 2 19200bps 38 4 38400bps Data bit configuration 2 Refer to the data bit configuration Interval time 0 to 250 1 Items and setting range are common to communication 1 and communication 2 12 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 3 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Data bit configuration Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8n1 8 None 1 8n2 8 None 2 8E1 8 Even 1 8E2 8 Even 2 801 8 Odd 1 802 8 Odd 2 3 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the FB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following gt FB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 45 9 5 Temperature
79. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT2000 series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 2 For GT Works3 Version1 gt NEES Z IL LN A 0 EEE EEE mHITACHI IES PLC mGE PLC mHITACHI PLC 5 INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC mFUJI PLC 5 SAFETY CONTROLLER mFUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER mSIEMENS PLC gYASKAWA PLC mYOKOGAWA PLC mYOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER mALLEN BRADLEY PLC SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION 1 Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions WARNING resulting in death or severe injury j Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the N caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it
80. Precautions when preparing a cable 3 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less 4 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 5 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 7 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side When connecting an LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 5 12 3 2 RS 422 cable m Connection diagram 12 8 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 4 Side Settings 12 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 12 4 2 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment gt 0 a Manufacturer LS Industral Systems 8 controller Setting 115 Industrial Syst cH2 None jStworR DUDIEX fj Routin
81. SG 30 5 28 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal E m Connecting terminating resistors 4 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 RS 485 connection diagram 8 d Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4W 2 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller in 1 SDB Z spai 1 e SEN L de SDB bog bog SDA l b og SDB1 2 H SDA RDA1 3 i RDB RDB RDB1 4 RDA E RDA 2 SG 9 x E X ia E 7 E 1 lt SDA2 5 seca SDB2 6 we 4c a RDA2 7 RDB2 8 FG 10 5 lt ral Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table o Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Signallname GREEN Series GREEN Series UT35A ESA ema gt UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A product condition es oe Mud UP55A product condition comelitem LE Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 2 SDB 23 21 301 407 501 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 5 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 2 2 5 27 25 303 409 503 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 17 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 18 2
82. SG E T 5 5 mn T mn SG 6 PE Renee 1 GND 14 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 2 Cc 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series UT UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A er Tm n ES UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 301 407 501 SDA 302 408 502 RDB 304 410 504 RDA 305 411 505 5 303 409 503 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UT55A Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model With CH3 UP55A Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire t
83. Set the unit address using the rotary switch address setting switch Rotary switch Address setting switch a Coy 23 AY Lower digit setting Ss Set value x1 91 Upper digit setting Set value x10 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 90 78 8 Eve 2 i 4 4 8 Odd 1 5 8 Odd 2 The rotary switch address setting switch is also used for the data interval extension time setting 6 Setthe maximum time from when the last character stop bit is sent from the GOT side until the transmission cable The setting method is the same as that of the module becomes ready to receive address For the data interval extension time refer to the 9 5 17 Connecting to B400 following gt 4 Data interval extension time settings 222 Communication settings Make the communication settings of B400 using the 4 Data interval extension time settings rotary switch key the DIP switch Set the data interval extension time as the following procedure For the operation procedure refer to the B400 manual 1 Tum the power of the module OFF em Satme renge seme Unit address setting 4 1 Rotary switch setting 2 Set the DIP switch 4 and 6 to ON and 5 to OFF CH1 to CH8 7 SW1 SW2 4800bps 9600bps 3 Set the data interval extension time using the rotary Communication speed
84. Terminating Enable ON ON resistor Transmission speed Switch No selection Disable OFF bps 1 2 3 1 Set as necessary i Set these gt 2 Disabled 9600 OFF OFF OFF 2 19200 ON OFF ON 38400 OFF ON ON 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 17 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 Settings of data length parity bit stop bit master slave device and echoback EEEEEEE 11 1 2 4 5 6 if 8 9 9 Set these switches 5 5 8 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 7 No 1 No 15 No 6 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed Setting item Set value a 1218121619 e 1 to 199 Stop bit 1bit ON 216 to 255 Even OFF OFF ZINAR Pany A ON ORF Specifying a station No between 200 and 215 HRS OBS Example of specifying the station No 215 EET 1 Setthe
85. The notation of the data registers with the bit specification differs between the GOT and the PLC The following shows the correspondence table Device name Displays the device type and setting range which are Inf ti selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Host Select this item to monitor the controller specified Network as the host station in the GOT utility setup Select this item to monitor a controller other than Oth the one specified as the host station 14 16 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Notation in GOT Notation in PLC DB1 DBWO bO DB1 DBX1 0 DB1 DBWO b1 DB1 DBX1 1 DB1 DBWO b7 DB1 DBX1 7 DB1 DBWO b8 DB1 DBX0 0 DB1 DBWO b15 DB1 DBX0 7 DB1 DBW2 b0 DB1 DBX3 0 DB1 DBW2 b7 DB1 DBX3 7 DB1 DBW2 b8 DB1 DBX2 0 DB1 DBW2 b15 DB1 DBX2 7 14 4 1 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Series 14 4 3 SIEMENS 57 Ethernet Device Device y No Device name Setting range Device name Setting range represen represen tation tation Input relay 1 10000 to 15117 Input relay 1 10000 to 11277 8 Output relay Q Q0000 to Q5117 Decimal Output relay Q0000 to Q1277 Decimal 5 Bit memory 00000 to M20477 3 Bit memory M M0000 to M2557 Specified bit of the 2 Specified bit of the a
86. confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct gt Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 1 3 Precautions Precautions for changing model 1 When devices that cannot be converted are included When setting of Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again 2 When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network The network will be set to the host station 2 a O X O a 2 O lt a 3 When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to None The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No as In this case set the device again Since the channel No is retained the objects can be reused in other channel No in a batch by using the Device Bach Edit CH No Batch Edit or Device List 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 11 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings onto the GOT For details on writing to GOT refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto th
87. of the communication detail settings Monitoring and writing with bit specification of word All device are performed only for the station No set for Host Address When writing the data in numerical input the data is written to the connected temperature controller other than the ones specified by the word device during input and the temperature controller set for Host Address is monitored during other than input displaying Network Select this item when monitoring the temperature controller of the specified station No After selecting set the station No in the following range Statio 1 to 99 To monitor the temperature controller n No of the specified station No 100 to 115 To specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register GD 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER UT2000 UTAdvanced Device name Setting range Device Ne representation g Internal relay 1 10001 to 17072 Decimal gt i 44 Specified bit of the Word device bit following word devices Data register D0001 to D9000 8 Decimal 5 File register B 72 0001 to B1600 g rting bit devi Bit device word anyer bs into word 1 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 2 This is available only for UP750 and UP550 8 33 8 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 4 a 2 E 2
88. time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 15 11 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 11 16 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 7 Precautions 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model 12 2 12 2 System 12 3 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 7 12 4 GOT Side 5 12 9 12 5 PLC Side 5 12 10 12 6 Device Range that Be 12 11 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communication Series Model name Clock Tee Connectable model Refer to K80S K7M DOOOS DC RS 232 GT IGT TD m 1205 K7M DOOWOu RS 422 RS 232 GT K200S 07 15 BS 7971222 RS 232 GT K300S K4P 15S dps 371223 12 2 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 1 Connecting to K80S K120S When connecting to one PLC Communication driver C 41111 LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable
89. 0 to 300m GOT Default 0 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 5 PLC Side Setting 3 5 1 Connecting to communication POINT module HITACHI PLC For details of HITACHI PLCs refer to the following Communication settings manuals Make the communication settings of the 57 HITACHI PLC user s Manual Communication mod le 1 The ranges of available channel No differ depending the model of communication module 2 Avoid duplication of the channel No Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting Model name Refer to Item Set value LQE560 Channel No 72 0 to 3 LQE060 Protocol setting H 7338 protocol Communication module LQE160 3 5 1 Transmission speed 19200bps fixed LQE565 Data bit 8bits fixed LQE165 Parity bit Odd fixed 5 Start bit 1 bit fixed E Stop bit 1 bit fixed 2 2 2 O switch EGE Setting switches for the channel No Ec and the protocol
90. 1 0 Redundant SE 8 Ap Station No Switch aes i GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5023 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethemet Setting gt Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address 1 cd 1 1 SIEMENS 57 1 1 1 1 OK Ay Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected Station Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank SIEMENS S7 T SIEMENS 7 fixed fixed fixed Set the IP address of the connected PLC side IP IP Address Ethernet module Fonte Default blank Set the FETCH port No of the FETCH Port No 5 connected Ethernet module 1024 to 65534 Default 2000 For the WRITE port No of the connected Ethernet module the lue that the FETCH port No i WRITE Port No 4 ue tnat 16 port O 4025 to 65535 incremented by one is set automatically Default 2001 Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed 14 3 4 PLC side setting 2 Ethernet connection type OP communication This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver SIEMENS OP Ethernet B Controller Setting Controller Setting E CH1 SIEMENS OP Etht cH2 None Manufacturer SIEMENS Controlle
91. 1 2W should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 37 m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 14 RS 485 connection diagram 14 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller NE SDAI 4 f Li 3 Li Li RX SDB1 2 T 45 EE f a 5 RX RDA1 11 a EE m a RDB1 4 7 se s ee y a SDA2 5 DE eee p SDB2 6 sc 3 RDA2 7 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4Wy 2 FG 10 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 3 7 m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 15 RS 485 connection diagram 15 RS232C RS485 4 zi interface converter Temperature controller Temperature controller 11 RDAC ba ba ij SDA 1 r1 r1 11 RDA tit RDB bg Y SDB 2 T T T RDB T SDAQ T RDA 3 i 1 f SDA 1 1 SDB 1 1 RDB 4 BE m r1 DB
92. 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 23 9 2 System Configuration l E 2 O 2 3 a H D Z E 2 2 O When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter COM A Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 E Connection cable 1 T n Interface bM s aud Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller NS converter Number of Cable model Model Commu Cable model Max connectable Model name Connection diagram name nication Connection diagram distan Option device Model equipment number Type number ce GT 27 W BF 28 0500 0 5m Built into oe W BF 28 1000 1m Up to 31 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 28 3000 s zu THV A1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1000m COM A RS 232 28 3000 fr 15m ior W BF 02 3000 3m 9 97 RS 232 connection 1607 preparing GT15 RS2 9P diagram 2 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 24 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration
93. 2 3 1 2 1Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT OS project data and communication settings onto the GOT gt Verifying the project data and OS Verify the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT lt 3 1 2 2Checking the project data and OS writing GOT V Attaching the communication unit and 371 30ption Devices for the Respective Connection con necting the cable gt 71 Cables for the Respective Connection Mount the optional equipment and prepare connect the Each chapter System Configuration connection cable according to the connection type 2 7 Each chapter Connection Diagram V Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication gt Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility Developer L gt 1 6Checking for Normal Monitoring etc gt 1 5Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Settings of the Utility 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment When using the GOT at the first time make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT Set the communication interface of the
94. 2 to No 4 put a check mark at Use CH Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC Q OS 0 2 CH3 None CH4 None Network Duplex Settir E Routing Informatio Gateway E Communication El Gateway Serve 2 9 Gateway Client Mail Fu FTP Server Fig File Transfer F i fh Q Redundant AQ Station No Switch Ethernet Setting MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a list of lower scree Standard I F Ethemet Mutti Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway x GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 5001 se x Host Net No Station Unit Type Address 1 1 QnUD P V QnUDEH 192 168 3 39 Item Description Use CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 to No 4 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the settings refer to the following 2 Setting Controller Type Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected For the settings refer to the following i CF 3 Setting I F bus Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT For the settings refer to the following 1 Setting Driver Detail Setting 1 Setting Driver Make settings for the transmission speed and data
95. 20000 005 20000 006 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 20000 064 11 8 Communication Type RS 422 Cable model Connection diagram number RS 422 connection diagram 3 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration Max distance 1200m Option device Built into GOT Model GT 27 GT 23 GT15 RS4 0S GT 27 Communication driver SNP X Number of connectable equipment Up to 8 PLCs for 1 GOT 11 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 11 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side Communication Modules CD 1 1 SHILD RD RXD 2 2 TD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 l 4 RTS SG 5 7 SG DR DSR 5 CTS RS RTS 7 8 DCD CS CTS kJ 20 DTR eed FG 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC CD 1 uos RD RXD 2 k 4 TXD SD TXD 3 gt RXD ER DTR 4 1 RTS SG 5 GND DR DSR 6 r 2 CTs RS RTS 7 i 5 DCD CS CTS 8 DTR NC g J 7 5V FG 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual x GE PLC user s Manual Precautions when preparing a cabl
96. 3 Control CompactLogix Property Value m Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Sum Check Type BCC Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Adapter Address 0 Host Address 0 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps M transmission speed used for 19200bps Transmission nmn Speed communication with the connected 38400bps p equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with Data Bit Tbits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a Nona parity check and how it is performed Parity MM Even during communication Odd Default None Specify the format in which the sum check is performed during BCC Sum Check Type communication when performing sum 16 Default BCC Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the adapter address station No of the PLC that the GOT will Adapter Address E us 0 to 254 monitor in the connected network Default 0 Specify the host address station No Host Address of the adapter to which
97. 38400bps 2 DIP switch setting z SW3 switch address setting switch Data bit configuration 0105 For the setting method refer to the following Gommunication EASA 2 gt 3 Module address settings specification setting 3 DIP switch settings Termination resistor SW4 4 the power of the module ON setting Enable Disable The FAIL RUN lamp lights in green and the set time 4 When the setting value is 98 99 the communication becomes valid address is the same as for 97 1 Rotary switch setting SW1 SW2 5 Tum the power of the module OFF again and set the Set the unit address using the rotary switch DIP switches and rotary switch to the original position Rotary switch Address setting switch l Z O Z 2 3 a E o Y c Z E 2 2 O 9 5 16 Connecting to SB1 ols o 2 SW1 Lower digit setting Communication settings 55 Set value 1 Make the communication settings of SB1 using the 18 ORO switch key on the front surface swe Upper digit setting For the operation procedure refer to the SB1 manual Set value x10 Item Setting range Setting range Communication 0 RKC communication Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary protocol 2 1 MODBUS CH1 to CH4 switch setting value 1 Device address 173 ied Unit address setting The communication address i
98. 5 6 7 0 10 0 102 110 3 104 LIOS 106 107 8 uto 1422 uta ut4 14155 ute utz 16 120 12 1 112 2 u23 124 125 126 127 24 uso 13 2 3 3 13 5 32 Device range error e EFI input Offset 0 1 2 3 8 to 15 0 EM10 E1111 12 E1113 16 EM20 EM21 EM22 E123 32 E130 1131 E132 E133 48 Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 240 256 E1210 E1211 E1212 1213 272 E1220 1221 E1222 1223 288 E1230 E1231 E1232 E1233 Device range error 302 Device range error 13 6 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 5 Device Range That Can Be Set CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 Connectable Model 6 14 2 14 2 Serial 14 3 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 9 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 14 15 T 2 E D O z E 2 2 O 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communication pe Series Clock Connection Connectable model Refer to GT HAS Fuss SIMATIC S7 200 x OP GT communication gt 14 32 GT RS 232 37 14 2 1 FETCH GT IGT SIMATIC 57 300 1 ue usd Ethernet O
99. 5 2 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 or 9 5 4 COMNMECHON d BIT Te g epe 5 7 5 921 1893292 CablO 5 7 5 3 2 IRS A85 Cable 5 tete eic RR ee eee eee aes 5 8 GOT Side Settings iniiis de Le de Rd ehe Soave t dened leave dad 5 12 5 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 5 12 5 4 2 Communication detail 05 5 12 Temperature Controller Side 2 000000 5 14 5 5 1 Connecting to 4 5 9 20202 4 4000 10 20 0 ei 5 14 5 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 or 9 44 0000 0 0 5 14 5 5 3 nad dd eade dd seda dde edd o dd e nda dde d da dd Rd 5 15 5 5 4 Connecting to interface converter 77 5 15 5 5 5 Connecting to interface converter 5 0 5 16 5 5 6 Connecting to interface converter 5 485 eem 5 17 5 5 7 Connecting to interface converter 35 10 5 17 5 5 8 Station number esas nene anta oda sede aedes and 5 18 Device Range that Can Be eene tenente nennt nhan ndash tena nasa 5 19 5 6 FE JIPXR EXG PXEIL iicet lateat li
100. 5 7 PYSCAUIONS ET 5 20 uj E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O 2 E 2 2 O 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to PXR3 FARA RS 232 23 2 PXR5 27 23 gt Sen Micro PXR9 Controller X PXGA PXG5 RS 485 PXG9 27 23 27 522 PXH9 5 2 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model List 5 2 System Configuration 5 2 1 Connecting to PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 or PXR9 When connecting via the RS 232 communication Communication driver m FUJI PXR PXG PXH aes Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperat ure Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT Number of controller Cabl del Cabl del Model equipment fa Connection diagram ication Connection diagram Option device Model Ww name distance name distance number Type number l GT 7 9 Built into GOT 93 H 2 User User i 5 485 500m 771 RS 232 99 232 connection 45 connecti
101. 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 29 8 6 Device Range that Can Be 8 33 Precautions MPH 8 34 x O a E z 2 E lt lt x gt O z E o 2 2 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models mmunication Series Model name Clock 59 Connectable model Refer to UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 RS 232 GT GREEN UT750 RS 485 27 23 237 824 UP350 UP351 0 550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 UT130 UT150 RS 232 GT GT UT100 UT152 RS 485 2 7 822 07155 UP150 UT2400 RS 232 GT UT2000 UT2800 j RS 485 823 UT32A UT35A UT52A RS 232 UTAdvanced UT55A x 27 23 297824 UP35A UP55A UM33A 8 2 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model List 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced ams Connection cable 2
102. 6T 30m or 422 connection diagram 1 1200m Built into GOT GT15 RS4 9S GT Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 2 System configuration for connecting to FA500 Communication driver Loom YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Seri PC link jen Cable model Max Gu Tess connectable iiie module Pd Connection diagram number distance equipment Built into GOT GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m LC01 0N or 1 02 RS 232 15 GaR RS 232 connection diagram 3 27 GT15 RS2 9P FA500 link module GT09 C30R40302 6T 3m 1200m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T 20m LC02 0N RS 422 GT09 C300R40302 6T 30m or 27 65 422 connection diagram 2 GT15 RS4 98 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 7 2 3 System configuration for connecting to STARDOM Communication driver Loom YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable o lt gt lt o x 5 O z E o Z 2 O o
103. Controller Side Setting l E 2 O Z 2 a E o Y 14 Z E 2 Z O 9 5 7 Connecting to RB Series 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Communication protocol 1 MODBUS 9 5 9 Connecting to HA400 401 HA900 901 Device address 4 11099 Slave address 4 2 9600bps ommunication spee 3 19200bps Data bit configuration 2 Refer to the data bit configuration Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Communication 1 Item Setting range Communication speed 11 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Interval time 1 2 0 to 250 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Data bit configuration 8 1 8bit None 1bit 8 2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration 11 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 12 1 to 99 4 Slave address 1 Interval 3 0 to 250 ms Communication 2 Item Setting range Communication speed 271 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 8 None 1 1 8 None 2 2 8 Even 1 3 8 Even 2 4 8 Odd 1 5 8 Odd 2 3 Communication setting mode Set the communication
104. DSR 6 r 6 DSR 4705 Precautions when preparing a cable CS CTS CTS EENE 4 Cable length NC 9 9 NC The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less US 5 GOT side connector 1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 For the GOT side connector refer to the following 297 1 4 1 connector specifications 6 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the Interface converter side GOT side SI 30A KS 485 temperature controller NC 1 i 1 FG RD RXD 2 amp RXD 1 1 SD TXD 2 TXD ER DTR 4 20 DTR 1 SG 5 i 7 SG 1 1 DR DSR 6 6 DSR 1 RS RTS 7 4 RTS CS CTS k 5 CTS NC 4 9 NC FG Other than above 1 Use the interface converter in the DCE mode 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 7 4 uj zi J O 2 E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O 2 E 2 2 O 5 32 RS 485 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W 2 converter Wm Sui Temperature Temperature RC 77
105. F 18 0 Redundant AD Station No Switch GOT Ethemet Setting Property GOT Net No GOT Station GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port 5017 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Value 1 1 Ethernet Setting dh X C8 Host NetNo Station Unit Address 1 1 YOKOGAWA 1 1 1 1 1 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type STARDOM FA500 FA M3 I F Interface to be used Driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 72 7 3 2 m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 communication setting Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5017 Retry Times 3 Star
106. GD11 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error 115 GD25 occurs 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 11 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 12 12 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Model 13 2 13 2 System 13 2 13 3 GOT Side 5 13 3 13 4 PLC Side 5 13 4 13 5 Device Range That 13 5 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Type FX3 CPU000000 ae FXS CPU130002 CPU130002 13 2 System Configuration Refer to 13 2 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft Communication driver SICK Flexi Soft Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Series E Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT 27 Built into GOT 23 Part Number 6021195 2m 1 Flexi Soft RS 232 cod 1 PLC for 1 GOT
107. GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S 3 GOT Ethemet Setting RE W communication port No Ethernet setting s transparent port No 2 xr Set the GOT port No for the connection with the Ethernet ld m RS module 1024 to 5010 GOT 5023 to 65534 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu Set the following items Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type Depends on Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE SIEMENS 7 Ethernet OP communication SIEMENS OP Ethernet I F Interface to be used Driver Depends on Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway OP communication Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment gt 14 3 3 BCommunication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 3 1 1 2 communication setting Communication Port No Default Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway 5023 Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway 5024 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT s
108. Hitachi Ltd 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 3 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 2 Connecting to 510 Communication driver HITACHI S10mini S10V Connection cable i I 11 Connection cable GOT Number of Sai Communication Cable model Max n connectable ds module Connection diagram number distance E equipment GT 27 Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m LQE560 E LQE060 RS 232 15m LQE160 Gea RS 232 connection diagram GT GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 S10mini communication module GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m Built into GOT 23 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m LQE165 m Em 27 GRRS 422 connection diagram 2 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Hitachi Ltd For details of the product contact Hitachi Ltd 3 4 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 2 System Configuration 3 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 3 31 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 For the GT16 GT15 GOT side D sub 9 pin PLC side CD 1 a Le 7 RS RD RXD 2 k 1 80 SD TXD 3 LL 2 RD 1 1 ER DTR 4 6 DR 1 1 SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 6 4 RS RTS 7 i H 4 fcD 1 1 CS CTS 8 M 8 Ics de EE
109. Part Number 6036342 3m 1 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by SICK Inc For details of the product contact SICK Inc 13 2 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Model List 13 3 GOT Side Settings 13 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 9 Controller Setting Gh Network Duplex Settir fj Routing Informatio 5 2 Gateway Communication EB Gateway Serve 2er SICK Flexi Soft 89 Gateway Clent Ferree E wai GD FTP Server File Transfer F Property Value ples aa Transmission Speed BPS 115200 Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Manufacturer Controler sick Flexi Soft z Standard F RS422 485 z 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer SICK Controller Type SICK Flexi Soft I F Interface to be used Driver SICK Flexi Soft 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 237 13 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when
110. SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA SICK SICK AG SIEMENS Siemens AG PLC Programmable controller manufactured by each corporation Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by each corporation Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Controller Controller manufactured by each corporation PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING o 2 gt z o Y 2 a rd a 3 a t a 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 3 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 12 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 14 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 19 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 22 1 6 Checking for Normal 0 1 24 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No to be used and perform the communication setting lt 371 18etting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings gt Writing the project data and OS Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option
111. Specify the host address station Host Add of the GOT to which the PLC is 0 to 99 channel to be used from the list menu m connected in the connected network B Default 0 3 Set the following items Set this item to adjust the Sb ne does Delay Time 2 the Osos Controller Type FUJI MICREX F GOT Default 5ms I F Interface to be used Driver FUJI MICREX F POINT 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer 1 Host address Controller Type I F and Driver are set f When connecting to PLC by RS 232 Make the settings according to the usage communication set the Host Address to 0 environment 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility lt 4 4 2 Communication detail settings The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project Click the OK button when settings are completed a ds on the Utility refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility m 3 Precedence in communication settings The settings of connecting equipment can be When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the confirmed in I F Communication Setting Utility the latest setting is effective For details refer to the following 297 1 1 2 communication setting 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 13 4 4 GOT Side Settings 4 5 PLC Side Setting FUJI PLC For details of FUJI PLCs refer to the follow
112. T link channel switch T link terminating resistor 1 Adjust the seti 2 Avoid duplica units x FUJI PLC user s Manual ings with GOT settings 3 the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal 4 Set as necessary Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch Character configuration gt switches Baudrate setting MODE switch T link channel switch T link terminating resistor ON OFF 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC ON OFF switch switch RS 485 station No switches 4 5 PLC Side Setting ion of the station No with any of the other RS 485 terminating resistor zi gt O E z E o 2 2 O 1 Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch MODE Switch position start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 start stop synchronization nonsequence format 2 RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 485 1 N 2 Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 station No switches Station No 0 to 99 ADDRESS 3 Connecting terminating resistors Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switc
113. Tasko 1 Right click the Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Tasks Task0 CYCLIC and select Insert Program instance 2 Define the program instance name and select Emulator for the program type 7 2 12 Precautions 6 Defining Target Setting Define the IP address or host name of STARDOM for which the communication settings are made Device range Double click Physical hardware When performing monitoring with the GOT connected Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Target Setting to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects and input the IP address or the host name use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC Downloading the project When a device outside the range is set on an object an 1 Execute Build Make indefinite value is displayed on the object Same as when pressing the function key F9 No error is displayed in the system alarm For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs 2 Download after confirming that the compile error refer to the following manual does not occur Select Download in the project control dialog displayed when Online Project 2 gt 7 4 Device Range that Be Set control is selected Connecting to STARDOM 3 When the download is completed select Cold and start STARDOM 1 Redundant system When STARDOM is configured with a redundant system the connection is not supported 2 System alarm The PLC
114. Transmission Speed BPS 19200 AD Station No Switch Data Stop Bit 1bt Parity Even Sum Check Done Sum Check Type Boc Adapter Address 0 Host Address 1 SLC500 AB 1 N ewe aw 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer AB Controller Type Set either of the followings AB SLC500 AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 AB Control CompactLogix I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the followings AB SLC500 1 N 7 AB MicroLogix AB Control CompactLogix 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 10 2 5 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 10 8 10 2 Serial Connection can be 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC ll Communication detail settings 1 AB SLC500 AB 1 Ns Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Sum Check Done Sum Check Type BCC Adapter Address 0 Host Address 1 Item Description Rang
115. a BIT o Range MASTE R K z Device 0000 063F Network Eod o0 Device name Setting range MN a ation 4 relay P P0000 to PO63F o 2 mm Description Auxiliary relay M 0000 to M191F Decimal E Set the device name device number and bit number 8 Keep relay K K0000 to KO31F Hexadeci Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of 5 Link relay L 0000 to LO63F mal 4 device word device amp Special relay F 0000 to FO63F Informati Displays the device type and setting range which are A Timer contact T TO to T255 gt selected in Device Decimal Set the monitor target of the set device Countercontact C SOS Monitors the PLC of the specified station No evel m 0to 31 To monitor the PLC of the specified Auxiliary relay M 000 to M191 z Network Station station No Keep relay K K000 to K031 5 100 to 115 To specify the station No of the PLC to be monitored by the value of GOT 8 Link relay L L000 to L063 data register 3 Special relay F F000 to F063 Decimal 52 1 Thefollowing shows the relation between station numbers of Timer current value TO to T255 the PLC and the GOT data register Counter current value C CO to C255 tati i No GOT data register GD Setting range Step controller S S0 to 599 Data register D DO to D9999 100 GD10 0 to 31 1 Only reading is possible 101
116. a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 4 For the terminal number for connecting to FB series or RB series refer to the table below Terminal No Signal ks Z TIO 100 400 8700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 0 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 400 PF901 900 901 LEES RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications 5 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 8 RS 485 connection diagram 8 Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W More than 1000 in case of CB series 3 3 3 Interface converter Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature side CD 485V controller controller controller controller a a TRB TRB WIT I TRE TRB 0 2 Li Li B B Li Li B B a a TRA TIRA rt
117. at a terminal station 2 RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC terminating resistor 1200 PLC H INL 9 RT SDA 1 REED 11 11 RD B SDB 6 ROA ao 10 RD A RDA 2 1 22 13 SD 7 2 SOS 12 12 SD A SG 5 1 d 7 sc RSA 3 RBAI 5 6 RTS A CSA 4 45 15 CTS A RSB 44 14 RTS B CSB 9 ug CTS B ee he det NS i 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 Connection Diagram 3 RS 422 connection diagram 3 GOT side PLC terminating resistor 120072 D RT ft i 9 a 9 RT spa E s I H x RD B SDB1 6 RP 10 r r 10 RD A RDA 2 8008 ag EE 1 SD B 7 8 e LH 12 SD A se 5 L1 38 sc RSA 3 Z 6 RTS A csa 4 H i CTSA as dd L 15 CTS A RSB 14 RTS B CSB 9 E CTS B L4 1 SHLD 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 Terminating resistor should be provided
118. cab moce ees Option device Model equipment ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT 27 Built into GOT 93 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 RS 232 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC FlexLogix or Sm 8 RS232 connection diagram 4 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 10 6 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 4 Connection Diagram RS232 connection diagram 4 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC CD 1 1 CD RS 232 cable RD RXD 2 3 TXD MM SD TXD 3 t 2 RxD 1 Connection diagram ER DTR 4 4 4 DTR RS232 connection diagram 1 n GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side 5 i DR DSR L 6 DSR CD 1 ep 700 URTUT 4 CD RS RTS 7 i gt 7 RTS RD RXD 2 i 3 TXD i CS CTS e 8 CTS SD TXD 3 it 2 RXD i 1 9 FG ER DTR 4 gt tM a T SG 5 5 SG 2 DR DSR 4 gt RS RTS 7 7 RTs 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length pog e E The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15
119. cable 2 converter r E Number of Pl etos connectable XE Cable model ES ua Xii Commu Cable model Max equipment x eme Connection diagram pose en name nication Connection dista Option device Model number eae Type diagram number nce number 2 W BF 28 0500 ST o 27 0 5m u W BF 28 1000 Built into GOT O 4 0 5 1 Up to 31 0 B prooo 8 88 422 w BF 01 1000 H coc P temperature 2 901 connection diagram 1 controllers 3 W BF 01 3000 or 27 for 1 GOT o m RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P connection diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 21 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485 V Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 _J Connection cable 1 Temperature 5 uberi Connection cable 1 Interface converter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT zi Max Number of connectable Model Cable model distance Model Commun Cable model Max equipment Connection diagram ication Connection diagram dista Option device Model name name number Type number nce GT PF900 27 901 Built into GT 400 23 1 User User Up to 31 temperat
120. connection via router 0 0 0 0 to Subnet Mask as ifthe sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default t here the GOT i Peradi 2 Ol M via d 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 _ _ Setthe GOT port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 a S W a ERN communication Except for 5011 2s 9 Default 5015 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 VL Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 transparent function Except for 5011 No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 14 12 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection Ethernet setting 1 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver SIEMENS S7 Ethernet cH3 None ED Gateway controler Setting Jsf Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio Communication i Gateway Serve BB Gateway Client CH1 SIEMENS S7 Ethe Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type SIEMENS S7 Ethernet Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a list of lower scree yr Standard V F Ethernet Muti Driver Ethernet SIEMENS 7 Gateway File Transfer F Property Value 3
121. cut from the system For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help l E Z O 2 3 a E o Y 2 2 E 2 2 O 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 53 9 7 Precautions 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 7 Precautions 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable 115 1 10 2 10 2 Serial 10 4 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 11 10 4 Device Range that Set 10 15 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series SLC500 Model name SLC500 20 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 Clock Communication Type RS 232 Connectable model SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 RS 232 Refer to C 371024 MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA RS 232 271 23 MicroLogix1000 Analog CPU 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A RS 232
122. device settings may not be monitored Setting item BIN16 gt 1 YOKOGAWA Device Information D 0001 Kind WORD Range 25 Device 0001 9000 CPU No lej U 1 Network All Selection Station No 1 Cancel d Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Device word device 1 The following shows relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register tati e GOT data register GD Setting range 100 GD10 11099 101 GD11 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error 115 GD25 occurs 2 When there is no setting for the CPU No in the communication settings on the temperature controller side set the CPU No on the GOT side to 1 default CPU Set the CPU No 1 2 of the device to be monitored No When device B is selected the CPU No is fixed to 1 Information Displays the device setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Select this item when writing data to all the temperature controllers connected When bit specification of word device is performed data are written to the temperature controller of the station No set for Host Address
123. error does not appear in the system alarm 3 GOT clock control Since the STARDOM does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled A lt lt x gt 2 E 2 2 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 15 7 2 Serial Connection 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 14 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V d Communication driver m Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Ethernet d Maximum Number of connectable Model interface Cable moda segment Option device Model equipment name 1 Connection diagram number 3 module length F3SP05 F3SP08 F3FP36 When PLC GOT is N 1 F3SP21 The following shows the F3SP25 E F3LE01 5T 10BASE T 2 for 1 GOT F3LE11 0T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or aud F3SP28 F3LE12 0T UDP 128 or less F3SP38 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP F3SP53 and 5 100m Built into GOT 23 When PLC GOT is 4 N Shielded twisted pair cable STP 5 59 2 E number of GOTs for 1 PLC 5 76 75 27 TCP 8 or less F3SP66 UDP 128 or less F3SP67 recommended to 16 or less F3SP71 4N 7 5 76 75 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2
124. for a PLC which will be a terminal Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or less 2 side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications S 3 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side 2 module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual z Connecting terminating resistors z 1 GOT side o Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to setthe terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of 2 GE PLC side When connecting a GE PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected gt GE PLC user s Manual 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 11 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 4 GOT Side Settings 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 GE SNP X 4 8 Controller Setting CHI lt GE Series 90 H2 None QD cua None GE Series 90 H4 Non Network Duplex Settir Ee Gateway fj Routing Informatio Standard 1 F RS422 485 GE SNP x p Communication Gateway Se
125. gt 3 RD ER DTR 4 gt 7 RV2 DR SG 5 9 SG DR DSR 6 5 cs RS RTS 7 6 RV1 ER CS CTS 4 RS 9 8 PHL Lu m MEME XE FG FG 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 NC GT11 NC Precautions when preparing a cable 3 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 4 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 5 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 7 2 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 200m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 4 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 2 HITACHI IES PLC side When connecting an intelligent serial port module to a GOT a terminating resistor has to be connected to the intelligent ser
126. number number GT 27 Built into GOT 93 W BF 02 0500 0 5m 3 ser i RS 422 W BF 02 1000 my3 83 422 connection 3 diagram 1 GT W BF 02 3000 3m 27 GT15 RS4 9S GT 27 Built into GOT 93 65 485 connection 1200 Up to 16 H PCP J diagram 1 GT temperature 27 controllers GT15 RS4 9S for 1 GOT W BF 02 0500 0 5m 3 ag W BF 02 1000 1m FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 9 3 i W BF 02 3000 3m GARS 485 connection FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m diagram 3 5 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m W BF 01 0500 0 5m 374 W BF 01 1000 1m 34 97 BE 04 34 W BF 01 3000 3m GT15 RS4 TE or 5 485 connection diagram 2 1 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 3 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 4 To use the dedicated cable conversion of the cable may be necessary 5 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 6 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 2 Connecting to H PCP B When connecting to one temperature controller Modular connector 1 1 Connection cable Communication driver em RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS
127. of Model Commun Cable model Cable model eism connectable name ication Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment Type number number Built into GOT B400 RS 422 RSA RS 422 Use RS 422 souk Up to 31 temperature specificati connection diagram 3 connection diagram 4 GT controllers for 1 GOT ons 27 GT15 RS4 9S 27 G82 RS 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT 93 GT E FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m 1 unin ani S 3 4 GT p to 31 temperature specificati RS 485 635 85 485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 23 controllers for 1 GOT ons FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m GT 27 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 29 9 2 System Configuration l E 2 O 2 3 a E o Y D Z E 2 2 O 9 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 9 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector 1 CD 1 GONG 1 NC RD RXD 2 k 2 SD TXD RD ER DTR 4 i 5 NC
128. provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 Interface Terminating resistor 1000 1 2W 2 converter Temperature Temperature 5 485 lt controllerside controller side ba ba ra TRD 2 as m 7 TRD 3 L1 i 2449 SG 1 y 3 T S 3 2 FG 9 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 8 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 4 RS 485 connection diagram 4 GOT side Temperature Temperature controller side F 7 controller side QU 1 1 1 RR SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 NC SG SDA2 TXD2 NC SDB2 TXD2 NC RDA2 RXD2 RDA1 RXD1 10 RDB2 RXD2 RDB1 RXD1 12
129. setting mode using the operation panel of the RB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following RB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 5 8 Connecting to PF900 900 BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration 27 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 22 1 to 994 Slave address 2 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps Communication protocol 1 MODBUS Data bit configuration 1 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Device address 1 Slave address 1 1 to 99 4 Interval time q 2 3 4 0 250 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary When the setting value is set to 0 a communi
130. station No to 200 or or 2 Input 215 to the internal device GD10 Echo back Without OFF 3 The station No 215 is specified For details refer to 2 Indirect specification shown below 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 200 to 215 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller 200 GD10 201 GD11 202 GD12 203 GD13 204 GD14 205 GD15 206 GD16 1 0 255 207 GD17 For the setting other than the above error 208 GD18 dedicated device is out of range will 209 GD19 210 GD20 211 GD21 212 GD22 213 GD23 214 GD24 215 GD25 5 18 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correc
131. temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table lt o Model of temperature controller Signal GREEN Series GREEN Series x UT UP UM us SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 gt RDB 25 23 RDA 26 24 5 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal m Connecting terminating resistors 4 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 13 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 14 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 GOT side Temperature controller 1 ij Temperature controller T F it iil it 1 1 SDB RDA 2 L4 SDB i4 e SDA 7 SDA 1 1 1 1 SDA 1 mc RDB RDAC 11 1 6 BC RDA 1 1 SG 5 SG 1 1 f RSA lt lt CSA 4 54 RSB 8 Terminating resistor gt CSB 9 FG 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of te
132. tinte enam annie kn ante een nne 3 2 3 2 i System Config ration ett Re eH RA eR tec dde 3 3 3 21 _ Connecting to 510V iiie Hr Le eee Eo du ee e Le dede E Ee dg n 3 3 3 2 2 Connecting to S0mini IR E d la 3 4 3 3 Connection Diagram 2 erede i dde etn dd dd 3 5 3 924 RS 232 cable eR eme Hebe cte bee e 3 5 3 3 2 RS 422 cable itid den Lr dni iE der d den E aden dae 3 5 3 4 Orde SOUINGS iiss ie meine 3 6 3 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 3 6 3 4 2 Communication detail emen nnnm 3 6 3 9 PEG Side Setting iac meo her deed qnd tetto en a dn t e inten 3 7 3 5 1 Connecting to communication module 3 7 3 6 Device Range that Can Be 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 3 8 3 6 1 HITACHI S10mini S10V 3 8 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable Model List 2 eiiis sedisse eintreten a nnn ntn 4 2 42 System Configuration rire ome Ea PEN Pb vd 4 3 4 21 Connecting to MICREX E55 iue eere eue RE 4 3 4 2 2 Connecting to 0 4 5 4 2 3 Connecting to 1205 1405 15 5 4 8 4 3
133. to FB Sere ede TES 9 45 9 5 7 Connecting to RB Series pecie o aac a RE 9 46 9 5 8 Connecting to 900 900 a a 9 46 9 5 9 Connecting to HA400 401 900 901 9 46 9 5 10 Connecting to A500 ducts eros eric nee 9 47 Connecting to RMGBOO ER 9 47 9 5 12 Connecting to 900 901 9 47 95 13 Connecting to aici eee ai ea be ae ee ee 9 47 9 5 14 Connecting to 5 100 5 200 9 48 9 5 15 Connecting to X TIO 9 48 9 5 16 Conriecting to SB 9 49 9 5 17 Connecting to B4 00 adi iMt ME ge cias 9 49 9 5 18 Station number setine E T A T 9 50 Device Range that Can Be 9 52 9 671 REKE SR MINE Ge iet dee REG eR REGARDE 9 53 wie Be Pm 9 53 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 Connectable Model 10 2 10 2 decedat eri se e caegeevia E d a ae deua 10 4 10 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series 10 4 10 2 2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 10 5 10 2 3 System Configuration for conn
134. to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Some failures of the communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction The GOT backlight failure disables the operation on the touch switch s When the GOT backlight has a failure the POWER LED blinks orange blue and the display section dims In such a case the input by the touch switch s is disabled The display section of the GOT is an analog resistive type touch panel GT27 The GOT is multi touch compliant however do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction GT23 If you touch the display section simultaneously in two points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in two points or mor
135. with the PLC CPU Driver Set either of the following Default 3sec YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec YASKAWA CP9200 H Default 3sec YASKAWA CP9300MS MC compatible Specify the host address station No YASKAWA 2000 900 92005 of the PLC to which the GOT is Host Add ted in the network of th 1to 31 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Ne Sor 9 Controller Type I F Driver set Default 1 Make the settings according to the usage environment Set this item to adjust the 6 2 8 Communication detail settings di the 0 to 30 Delay Time communication request from the GOT 10ms Click the OK button when settings are completed Default Oms The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 12 communication setting 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 13 6 2 Serial Connection 1 Delay Time When connecting to PLC CP 9200 H and CP 9300MS set the following 6 2 9 PLC Side Settings Model name Delay Time CP 9200 H 30ms or more port 0 10ms or more CP 9300MS port 1 30ms or more 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data F
136. 00 SB1 RS 485 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 10 1 3 6 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 11 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 12 2 4 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 35 9 3 Connection Diagram l E 2 O Z 2 3 a E o Y D 2 E 2 Z O 7 RS 485 connection diagram 7 SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature GOT side terminal block 4 Controller controller 4 controller 4 controller TR T R B Ho 770 71 TRO T R B 5 E f 11 TRO TIR A TRA TIR A T T rt 42 56 SG i 1 8G SG 3 pog p M 5 A 4 pog me 2 27 52 et s 5 A a Combination module Combination module i 7 y jj pog 8 i Terminating resistor 1200 1 2W 9 r1 More than 1000 in case of CB series 10 J ee 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM c Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be
137. 0304 6T 3m 27 Up to 16 t t 7 m n GT p to 16 temperature GT09 C100R40304 6T 10m 23 controllers for 1 GOT GT09 C200R40304 6T 20m GT09 C300R40304 6T 30m 1200 27 Gss RS 485 connection diagram 13 GT15 RS4 98 Up to 16 temperature 4 wire type controllers for 1 GOT UT2000 RS 485 GT FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m 27 55 5 485 connection diagram 11 4200m FA LTBGT2RACBL 10 1m 33 4 wire type n FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m Up to 16 temperature GT controllers for 1 GOT 27 GR RS 485 connection diagram 14 4200m GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED l 2 a E z O o a 2 5 n E lt gt lt o x 5 O z E o 2 Z O o 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver Lio YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced UE Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 m t RS232C RS485 Connection cable 1 gt Connection cable 2 GOT controller conver
138. 1 Communication format Select a communication protocol Default UDP UDP TCP 1 Set the same IP address and communication format as those of the PLC side 2 Set the port No of the host link service used on the PLC side 7 3 3 side setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Model name Refer to F3LE01 5T 7 3 4 Ethernet interface module F3LE11 0T F3LE12 0T 7 3 5 F3SP66 Built in Ethernet interface F3SP67 7 3 6 F3SP71 4N 7 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Right side view without the cover 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 07 07 07 07 ES 9 l lS al S 1 59 TS e beg 6561 beg 07 07 07 07 nile ay SG beg beg beg 6661 Hexadecimal CO A8 FA D2 l t t Decimal 192 168 250 210 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 19 7 3 Ethernet Connection lt gt lt o x 5 O Z E o z Z O o 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protec
139. 1 Transmission speed 9600bps B 12 Data bit 8bits fixed P 15 Parity bit Even odd none D 14 Stop bit 1bit fixed E 15 Station No 72 1to 16 F 16 Communication mode PC link communication mode 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Settings by switch Communication mode select DIP SW Communication setting Rotary switch Station No select Rotary switch 1 Settings of the transmission speed and the parity Make those settings by operating the communication setting Rotary switch 8 5 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 7bits 8bits Parity bit Even odd none Stop bit ibit 2bits Address 1 to 99 Minimum response time 0 to 10 x 10ms Protocol 0 PC link communication without sum check rotocol selection Transmission e 1 PC link communication with sum check Switch position Parity bit Speed FN Adjust the settings with GOT settings 0 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 1 9600bps Odd 2 Even 8 30 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 5 5 Connecting to RS232C RS485 converter ML2
140. 130 i Connection cable Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Model MEMOBUS Commun Cable model Max gt ication MER Option device Model equipment name module TEE Connection diagram number distance Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Dinor or according to RS 232 PLC side 1 GOT for 1 PLC Gs RS 232 connection diagram 1 specifications GT15 RS2 9P GL120 GL130 GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m JAMSC Reda GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m same as 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS 120NOM27100 GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m above module 1 or 5 422 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection lt 5 lt gt E Z E o z z O o 6 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or GL70H Connection cable Communication driver Loz YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Model MEMoBUs Commun Cable model Max M i x ication Option device Model equ
141. 2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UT55A Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E3 terminal area option Detailed code model With CH3 UP55A Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E4 terminal area option Detailed code model With 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal C37 m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 J 2 E 2 2 2 E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 23 8 3 Connection Diagram 18 RS 485 connection diagram 18 2 Temperature 1000 4 4W 2 Temperature GOT side controller 1 mutis HERR controller FU a Tow T 1 SDB SDA1 TXD1 6 E La SERE L
142. 2 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 11 8 2 System Configuration 8 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 8 31 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 RS232C RS485 Interface converter side GOT side ML2 n CD 4 1 RD RXD 2 it 2 RD SD TXD s 3 sp j 1 ER DTR 4 4 1 1 1 5 5 7 5 SG 1 1 DR DSR 16 DR 1 1 1 RS RTS 7 7 RS 1 1 CS CTS E eee 9 Ti 9 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 4 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller 8 12 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 3 2 RS 485 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 RS232C RS485 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W Temperature inter
143. 2 9 7 5 222 REOR 9 53 l E 2 O 2 a E o Y 2 2 E 2 2 O e 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models icati Series Model name Clock Connectable model Refer to RS 232 H PCP J x RS 422 737924 SR Mini HG RS 485 H PCP B 7 5 422 271 23 L 922 2 10 RS 232 SRZ Z DIO x RS 422 37923 Zr RS 485 CB100 CB400 RS 232 CB CB500 x RS 485 37924 CB700 CB900 FB100 x RS 485 FB400 RS 232 FB 9 2 5 x RS 422 FB900 RS 485 RB100 RB400 RB RB500 x RS 485 737926 RB700 RB900 PF900 ere PF BESOJ x RS 422 RS 485 HA400 401 RS 422 900 901 RS 485 cr fer RMC RMC500 x RS 485 274 23 37 927 M RS 232 MA hao x RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 AG 500 PIE RS 422 THV THV A1 x iugum 237928 SA100 RS 232 SA SA200 5 RS 485 27 927 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List Continued to next page Series SRX Model Communication Type RS 232 RS 485 Connectable model Refer to 37929 SB1 SB1 RS 232 RS 485 C 3792 0 B400 B400 1 From the models of temperature contr
144. 2 connection diagram 4 Use communication 1 for the communication format The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 9 2 System Configuration GOT Number of connectable Option device Model equipment GT 27 Built into GOT 93 Up to 31 temperature 2 1000m controllers for 1 27 GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER GT15 RS4 0S When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS 485 Communication driver 0 RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS l O Qc 2 O Connection cable 5 Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of c Model Communication Cable model Max SUD evite Yon connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance P equipment E GT Q G8 RS 485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT 23 1 FB100 FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 27 o FB400 RS 485 05 485 ion di 6 1200 FA LTBGT2RACBL 100417 GT Up to 31 temperature 485 connection diagram 6 m 23 controllers for 1 GOT E FB900 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m GT 27 5 5 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 2 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 C
145. 200 1500 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series D and later When connecting to multiple PLCs DH485 network Connection cable Communication driver AB MicroLogix qp oe A dn di Adapter PLC Connection cable GOT Number of T Communic ee Xm connectable Series Adapter mu Connection diagram eane ption device ode equipment number Built into GOT 5 MicroLogix1000 1770 RS 232 US RS232 connection 15m 1 GOT for 1 adapter 1200 1500 diagram 2 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series C and later 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 5 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series Communication driver Control CompactLogix Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT ai T Number of connectable Series Communic
146. 212 11 4 1038 0042 DW 025 0043 INC Dwo00025 DW 000 DW 026 0044 DW00000 DWO0026 014 4 1008 DW 001 DW 027 0046 DW00001 gt Dw00027 016 0048 IEND 0049 DEND 1 Set0 to PARAMOSG to 11 of 6 input relay input register coil holding register offset Do not make the offset settings When the offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the device 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 6 Precautions When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT 97 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 3 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub Mo
147. 255 14 bit T10 0 14 TT to 255 255 14 v 7 gt 15 E Timer Timing T4 0 13 DN to T4 255 13 DN it T T10 0 13 DN to T255 255 13 DN File type File No Element No BUD PN DN g Counter Up 5 0 15 to C5 255 15 CU gt counter C10 0 15 CU to 255 255 15 0 8 Decimal m Counter File type Down C5 0 14 CD to C5 255 14 CD File No Word delimiter C10 0 14 CD to 255 255 14 0 Element delimiter PUR on C5 0 13 DN to C5 255 13 DN As C10 0 13 DN toC255 255 13 DN Setting by GT Designer3 bit C Device N7 0 to N7 255 f 2 Integer N N10 0 to N255 255 7 4 7 z 2 ACC 0 me B3 0 to B3 255 Word BIER B10 0 to B255 255 File type File No Element No Timer Set T4 0 1 PRE to T4 255 1 PRE value T 12 T10 0 1 PRE to T255 255 1 PRE 2 AB Control CompactLogix a When setting a bit address as a bit device Heh Current T4 0 2 ACC to T4 255 2 ACC S value T T10 0 2 ACC to T255 255 2 ACC INT 3 64 015 5 64 Counter Set C5 0 1 PRE to C5 255 1 PRE Decimal File type Bit value C10 0 1 PRE to C255 255 1 PRE File No Element No Counter C5 0 2 ACC to C5 255 2 ACC Current C10 0 2 ACC to C255 255 2 ACC l value C Setting by GT Designer3 4 N7 0 to N7 255 Integer N N10 0 to N255 255 Device _ 1 Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit dat
148. 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary For cables needed for each connection refer to each chapter for connection 1 4 1 connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user RS 232 interface Use the following as the RS 232 interface and the RS 232 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector specifications Hard GOT ME Connector type Connector model Manufacturer version 1 GT27 9 pin D sub male DDK Ltd GT23 inch screw fixed type 29090 2 4 1 GT15 RS2 9P 9 pin D sub Spin D sub male 17LE 23090 27 D3CC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M inch screw fixed type 2 Connector pin arrangement o t 2 gt z o Y 2 a rd a 5 a 52 a GT27 GT23 GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M GOT main part connector see from the front 1 5 6 9 9 D sub male RS 422 485 interface Use the following as the RS 422 485 interface and the RS 422 485 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the
149. 30R20401 15P 3m H 40DR H 64DR RS 232 15 m H 20DT H 28DT RS 232 connection diagram 1 z H 40DT H 64DT GT15 RS2 9P HL 40DR HL 64DR Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 Transmission speed other than the GT Built into GOT 23 252 12 RS 232 15m above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m GT15 RS2 9P 232 connection diagram 1 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 95 8 232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m Sh 232 connection diagram 1 Built into GOT Specified transmission speed 19200bps EH CPU104 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m EH CPU208 232 connection diagram 2 E 3 Specified transmission speed EH ane RS 232 Jim EH CPU316 EH CPUB16 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m EH CPU548 2 232 connection diagram 2 GT Transmission speed other than the GT15 RS2 9P above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 1 To connect to 200 to 252 series connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module 2 connect to serial port 2 of H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC the round connector 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable C
150. 3PWR332 connection diagram 2 GT 27 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S ral Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation For the RS 422 connection connecting to the PLC PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Cable model Max connectable E Power Supplies 1 Model name cation Connection diagram distance Option device Model equipment gt number m Built into GOT IC693PWR321 2 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU363 9 8 PLC f IC693PWR331 RS 422 Reo 1200m isi IC693PWR332 CPU port 2 connection diagram 2 GT 1 GOT 27 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 5 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 2 Connecting to Series90 70 Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected For the RS 232 connection 1 Connection cable Communication driver SNP X PLC Connection cable GOT z Number of Communication BUE Saienisi connectable odel name cation onnection diagram ption device ode Modules Type ae ee distance quip 697 772 697 782 IC697CPX928 Built into GOT IC697CPX935 I
151. 485 connection diagram 5 500m GT15 RS4 TE controllers PXR9 for 1 GOT 6 52 RS 485 connection diagram 7 500m Built into GOT 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 5 2 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 9 or PXH9 When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver ir TIT FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Model name 5 a 2 Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT 27 Built into GOT 93 PXG4 PXG5 RS 232 ZZPPXH1 TK4H4563 1 3m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT PXG9 m PXH9 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by FUJI CO LTD For details of the product contact FUJI CO LTD 5 4 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers RS 232 communication Connection cable 2 Communication driver ozo FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connect
152. 5 14 1 16 2 11 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 2 15 3 12 4 following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector ae Modular connector pin No 9518858 6006 vgs Xu 9 a zr E 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 37 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 RS 485 connection diagram 9 RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side Modular connector Modular connector TRB 2 a ae i 2 TIR B TIRA 1 1 TIRA ji SG 3 T 3 SG 1 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 5 d For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 3 Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller Precautions when preparing a cable 10 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 11 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following K 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 12 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 38 9 CONNECTION
153. 5 interface 55 20 10 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m capsules or 27 G82 RS 485 connection diagram 1 500 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 4 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 System Configuration 4 2 2 Connecting to MICREX F70 For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following gt 4 7 Precautions When using general purpose interface modules Connection cable Communication driver m FUJI MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT General purpose Commun ication Coble model Max Option device Model name 1 Connection diagram number distance module Type Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or F70 NC1L RS2 RS 232 15m 1 GS8 RS 232 connection diagram 1 Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 general GT15 RS2 9P GT 27 purpose interface module Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable Communication driver m MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Model commun Cable mod
154. 5015 5012 5013 format med 49153 Set the slot No of the PLC to which 1024 to 5010 Slot No the Ethernet module is connected 0 to 16 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 FSvAAPUY p Default blank ERE EN transparent function Except for 5011 d 9 Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 Setting IP address and port No The same IP address cannot be set for the same port No The same IP address can be set for the different port No 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 13 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 3 3 PLC side setting POINT ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the following manuals 7 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manual Parameter setting Set the following parameters with the software package manufactured by the Allen Bradley Item Setting details Name Sets the name IP Address IP address of the connected module Slots No for installing the EtherNet IP communication Slot 5 module 1 For
155. 6 3 2 GOT SIde Setlings tere diste 6 18 6 3 3 GOT Ethernet 2000 0 00 00 60 NE E TE 6 19 6 3 4 side setting MP2000 series MP920 6 20 6 3 5 PLC side setting CP 9200SH series 312 317 6 24 6 9 6 BM tec aU Rack inp ERR 6 27 Device Range that Can Be 6 28 GET YASKAWA GL PROGIGO s irt tet se ere etre a eere c eda dee ie eee 6 28 6 4 YASKAWA 92005 900 nnn 6 29 6 4 3 YASKAWA CP9200 adserit 6 29 6 4 4 YASKAWA CP9300MS MC 6 29 6 4 5 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH 5 6 30 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 751 Gonnectable MOdel List 7 2 Ke cit Ad tui 7 3 7 2 1 System configuration for connecting to 7 3 7 2 2 System configuration for connecting to 00 7 5 7 2 3 System configuration for connecting to 7 5 7 2 4 Connection diagram eii nen ele ddr na acevo cov eee eevee 7 6 1 2 57 GOP SIDS SOUINGS x extet timer de date Tee Ra eue cha
156. 64 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 IC200UARO14 IC200UDD 104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDR001 IC200UDRO002 20000 003 1769 L35CR 1794 L33 1794 L34 GE Series 90 IC693CPU311 LS Industrial Systems MASTER K K7M DanoS DC K7M DoooU K3P 070S 4 15 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 SICK Flexi Soft FX3 CPU000000 FX3 CPU130002 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Series SIMATIC S7 300 SIMATIC S7 400 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 SIEMENS S7 200 SIMATIC S7 200 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface o 2 gt z o Y 2 a rd a 5 t 3 Setting I F The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used Set the I F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT 3rd stage Standard interface 4 Ethernet interface built in the GOT Standard interface 1 2nd stage RS 232 interface built in the GOT Standard interface 3 RS 422 485 interface built in the GOT lt Example the case of the GT27 A il Y i Ux D 5 Standard interface 2 USB interface built in the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication
157. 89 485 ss RS 485 diagram 3 GT15 RS4 98 Up to 31 temperature controllers 4 wire type for 1 GOT GT 27 5 52 5 485 connection diagram 4 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type 8 10 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration Temperature Connection cable GOT controller Number of connectable ommun 3 ie Cable model Max Series ication s Option device Model We Connection diagram number distance FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 7 User i i x Rs 485 RS 2 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 7 wire type FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 7 FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m GER RS 485 connection diagram 19 1200 FA LTBGT2R4ACBL10 1m 7 UT52A 2 wire type UT55A3 4 UM33A 5 Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 7 RS 485 485 connection diagram 10 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type For 1 to 6 only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected Suffix code Annotation Optional suffix code Remark Function Open network Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type Tora Without ILE 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 71 Product with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2
158. C697CPU780 sg IC697CPU788 697 711 RS 232 88 232 connection 45m 1 PLC for 1 GOT IC697CPU789 diagram 1 697 0731 IC697CGR772 GT15 RS2 9P IC697CGR935 IC697CPM790 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation For the RS 422 connection Communication driver Liz GE SNP X Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of PLC Communication es uin Max connectable 4 cation onnection diagram ption device ode equipment Modules Te number distance quip IC697CPX772 1 697 782 27 IC697CPX928 Built into GOT 697 935 697 0780 9 IC697CPU788 IC697CMM711 422 885 422 connection 4200m a danda IC697CPU789 diagram 1 9 697 0731 IC697CGR772 GT15 RS4 95 IC697CGR935 697 790 54 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 GT155 11 6 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 3 Connecting to VersaMax Micro Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected For the RS 232 connection Communication driver UT GE SNP X
159. CTS SD TXD 3 1 3 RXD 9 i 8 NC ee gaa oat eee ae ER DTR 4 6 NC se s 7 GND c RS 232 connection diagram 3 DROSR NG GOT side YASKAWA PLC side 11 RS RTS 7 4 RTS CD 1 1 i a CS CTS jeu 5 CTS RD RXD 2 2 TXD 9 8 EST SD TXD 3 gt 3 RXD ER DTR 4 H 141 RTS SG s H 7 GND DR DSR i 6 DSR RS RTS 7 LL s OP CTS CS CTS k i 8 PWR 9 DTR 6 10 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable c RS 422 connection diagram 3 a Cable length GOT side YASKAWA PLC side The maximum length of the RS 232 cable differs aa according to the specifications of the YASKAWA RDA 2 e L TX PLC side RDB le TX For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual SDA 1 E T 3 RX b GOT side connector SDB 6 gt 4 RX For the GOT side connector refer to the following Rsa i s gt 14 1 GOT Connector specifications RSB 6 YASKAWA PLC side connector aon Receiving side Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA ee 7 termination PLC side module CSB
160. Connection 5012 5013 and 49153 Ethernet setting Controller Setting CH1 YOKOGAWA STA CH2 None S sfa Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio Gateway Communication EL Gateway Serve 88 Gateway Client E FTP Server Fig File Transfer F 15 Q Redundant amp D Station No Switch Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controler Type YOKOGAWA STARDOM FASO0 FA M3 yr Standard I F Ethernet Multi Driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Detai Setting Property Value GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5017 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting 4 Ga E Host Net No Station Unit Type Address i 1 1 1 YOKOGAWA 1 1 1 1 emnes Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the Station connected Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank YOKOGAWA T YOKOGAWA fixed fixed Set the IP add f th RANA PLC side IP IP address connected Ethernet module address Default blank Port 2 Set the port No of the connected Ethernet module Default 12289 12289 1229
161. DT MP920 H 28DT MP930 H 40DT YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Series MP940 H 64DT CP 9200SH HL 40DR CP 312 HL 64DR CP 317 EH CPU104 FA500 EH CPU208 F3SP05 EH CPU308 F3SP08 EH CPU316 F3SP10 LQP510 F3SP20 LQP520 F3SP30 LQP800 F3FP36 HITACHI S10mini S10V LQP000 F3SP21 LQP010 F3SP25 LQP011 YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 Series F3SP35 LQP120 F3SP28 F55 F3SP38 F70 F3SP53 FUJI MICREX F Series F120S F3SP58 F140S F3SP59 F150 F3SP66 PXR3 F3SP67 PXR4 FUJI PXR PXG PXH F3SP76 7S PXR5 PXR9 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 100 UT35A NFJT100 UT52A F3SP05 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 F3SP08 UTAdvanced Series UP35A F3SP10 UP55A F3SP20 UM33A F3SP30 H PCP J F3FP36 H PCP A F3SP21 H PCP B YOKOGAWA STARDOWM FA MG Series F3SP25 Z TIO F3SP35 Z DIO F3SP28 Z CT F3SP38 CB100 F3SP53 CB400 F3SP58 CB500 F3SP59 CB700 F3SP66 CB900 F3SP67 FB100 F3SP76 7S FB400 UT320 FB900 UT321 RB100 UT350 RKC SR Mini HG RB400 UT351 RB500 UT420 RB700 UT450 RB900 UT520 PF900 UT550 PF901 UT551 HA400 401 UT750 HA900 901 UP350 RMC500 UP351 MA900 UP550 MA901 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 U
162. E RSLogix5000 and set devices while checking the tag names For how to import tag files refer to the following 3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Be Set Device settings of ALLEN BRADLEY PLC The ALLEN BRADLEY PLC device addressing consists of a file and element Make setting as follows using GT Designer3 1 AB SLC500 AB Micro Logix a When setting a bit address as a bit device B3 64 Z 15 File type Bit No File No Bit delimiter Element delimiter Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Device 64 15 File type File No Element No Bit No 4 7 T File type Bit No File No Bit delimiter Element delimiter Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Device T 4 51 17 NONE 14 TT File type File No Element No Bit No 10 15 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC b When setting an element address as a word 10 4 4 SLC500 device N 7 15 File type L Element Device File No Device name Setting range gt S esr represen Element delimiter tation 1 Bit B B3 0 0 to B3 255 15 Setting by GT Designer3 B10 0 0 to B255 255 15 Device Timer Timing 4 0 14 4
163. ECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER When connecting directly to temperature control module Z TIO Z CT Communication driver Cim RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communication Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram T Option device Model Type distance number 9 ee RS 485 1200 Built into GOT connection diagram 5 27 A GT FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 23 TIO 0 RS 485 Z TIO Up to 16 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m Z CT Up to 16 connection diagram SRZ RS 485 8 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 2 Z DIO Up to 16 Total of Z TIO Z CT and Z DIO 27 Up to 31 for 1 GOT 9 Res 1200 GT15 RS4 TE connection diagram 7 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 9 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to communication extension module Z COM with a converter EE Connection cable 2 Communication driver Cie RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS
164. EMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 51 uj 2 E z O 5 lt E x 2 O z E o 2 2 O 9 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt 1 RKC SR Mini HG Device ie Information 000 E Kind BOONE ORD 45 6 Device oJ Back Network Station No 1 2 Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Network 1 to 99 To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Station No 100 to 115 specify the stati
165. EQ Offset 0 1 2 3 to 15 device values are as follows 3m EGO a Input 1 16 Fixed to 0 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 45 6 7 480415 E 25 Pixed to 0 12 us 14 ns 18 18 256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error 16 24 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 um 32 3 1 132 13 34 135 136 37 13 8 48 4 1 14 2 14 3 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 64 51 152 153 154 155 156 157 15 8 80 61 162 16 3 164 16 5 16 6 167 168 Fixedtoo EM s o jis e i ie Sues 13 5 1 SICK Safety Controller SICK 112 18 2 18 3 18 4 185 18 6 18 7 18 8 4128 91 192 194 195 196 19 7 198 Flexi Soft 144 110 1 110 2 110 3 140 4 110 5 110 6 110 7 10 8 160 1114 111 2 141 3 111 4 111 5 111 6 111 7 1118 Dance 176 12 1 112 2 12 3 11244 112 5 12 6 112 7 112 8 No 192 Device range error Device sating enge represent b Output Q EE Input 1 11 1 to 112 8 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 97 8t0 15 0 912 013 9015 016 017 018 ee LUN NE Decimal 16 a21 22 23 a24 a2 5 02 6 a2 7
166. FUJI PXR PXG PXH 5 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property _ Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Retry Times 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 1 Delay Time ms 1 Format 1 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps transmission speed used for 19200bps communication with the connected 38400bps Transmission Speed PERS equipment 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed Parity BA Even during communication Odd Default Odd Set the number of retries to be erformed when a communication Retry P 0 to 5times error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec 4 RH Default 3sec The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Specify the host addices Tetalian NU Controller Type I F and Driver are set of the GOT to which the temperature Make the settings according to the usage Host Address controller is connected in the 1 to 255 environment connected network 5 4 2 Commu
167. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects they cause malfunction when entering our products Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation heat method Additionally disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION re t m E p e a INTRODUC ee E ep uetus om pete eoi edendi ecd E teen aad Subhas daa List of Manuals 3 eee te ee ee edu b de de vehe A 15 Abbreviations and Generic Terms asas sn d daa A 16 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication eene eene nnne enne renes 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel 1 1 2 UF communication
168. G 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable 3 Connecting terminating resistors 2 details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual C 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 2 RS 422 connection diagram 2 RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side Modular connector Modular connector R A 1 QNT R A RB 2 f H 2 R B SG 3 r 3 SG B 4 1 4 TA 5 5 TA SG N C 6 TN 3 6 SG NC 1 For details of the assignment refer to the following manual C 3 Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 3 RS 422 connection diagram 3 RKC temperature controller side temperature controller side 26 __ _ T A TB 27 H f T B 28 R A RB 2 H R B SG 25 f SG 1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No PF900 901 puis FB400 AG500 MA900 ane 2 FB900 HA400 401 MA901 900 901 specifications SG 25 25 44 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 T B 27 27 46 4 R A 28 28 47 1 R B 29 29 48 2 4 RS 422 connect
169. GOT at Controller Setting and I F Communication Setting GT Designers 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT Setting Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC Q QS Q 2 CH3 None MITSUBISHI e MELSEC 9 Q5 Qi7nD M NC DR CRnD 700 G ch Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio Bik Gateway Standard F RS232 Communication a Gateway Serve 1 CPU 0271 24 1171 24 Gateway Client FTP Server File Transfer F M Redundant 4 Station No Switch High Normal o z 2 gt o x 2 a 2 6 5 lt a 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Refer to the following explanations for the setting ETT m Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following gt Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer Controller Type Driver and I F When using the channel No
170. Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 12 CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 2 Connecting to K200S When connecting to one PLC Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of 4 Communic gavle model Max connectable Series Cnet I F module Bon Ives Connection diagram asane Option device Model equipment number Built into GOT K200S G6L CUEB 25 232 895 232 connection 4sm 1 PLC for 1 GOT diagram 2 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver Ce LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable 2 22222151 m pj 52555519 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Connection cable 1 Connection cable Connection cable PL 1 Cnet I F module 2 Max Cable model Commu Cable model Series Connection Model name nication Connection diagram number Type diagram number 0285422 RS 422 K200S connection G6L CUEC RS 422 connection 500 3 diagram 3 diag
171. Interface 1 1 2 I F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used Setting USB Ethernet 15 2nd 3rd RS232 Setting Driver E I C Ox Q U QnA A CPU QJ71C24 1371624 Detail Setting None M Detail Setting Host None Detail Setting Enable the 5V power supply Driver No None Detail Setting None None Detail Setting Detail Setting Detail Setting CH 0 0 0 0 None Detail Setting Gee 1 Select Common I F Communication Setting from the menu 2 The Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 9 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface o z 2 gt o x 2 a 2 6 5 lt a Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I F setting and extension I F setting Communication Setting CH No Driver RS422 485 1 Q CPU 027124 1971624 a Detail Setting x Detail Setting
172. J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET H communication unit used in the MNET 10 mode CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX Optical loop unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link IE Field Network 1000BASE T unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compatible Ethernet communication unit Built into GOT Ethernet 100Base TX For the connection to personal computer Wireless LAN communication unit GT25 WLAN IEEE802 11b g n compatible built in antenna station wireless LAN adapter for Japanese domestic use 1 14 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 2 Option unit FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 RS 485 terminal block FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 Connector Ree Terminal block conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 Product name Model Specifications Multimedia unit GT27 MMR Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 1 ch playing movie o Video input unit GT27 V4 Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch z RGB input unit GT27 R2 Z For analog RGB input signal 2 ch Video RGB input unit GT27 V4R1 Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch 2 RGB output unit GT27 ROUT Z For analog RGB output signal 1 ch
173. N Series 1 YOKOGAWA temperature controller Communication settings For details of YOKOGAWA temperature controller Make the communication settings by operating the key refer to the following manual of the temperature controller L gt Users Manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature 1 For the UTEUPLUMEJUS1000 except UT750 2 RS232C RS485 converter UP750 For details on communication settings of the m SEVERE RS232C RS485 converter refer to the following manual Transmission speed 9600bps fixed ET 73 User s Manual of RS232C RS485 converter Data bit bis Parity bit Even odd none Model name Refer to Stop bit ibit 2bits GREEN 8 5 1 Address 72 1 to 99 UT100 8 5 2 0 PC link communication without sum check Temperature controller 12000 853 Protocoliselection 1 PC link communication with sum check 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings UTAdvanced Rd 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units RS232C RS485 converter ML2 8 5 5 2 For the UT750 UP750 Item Set value pui M 9600bps fixed communication i tcp Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps ME 38400bps communication Data bit 7bits 8bits Parity bit Even odd none o Stop bit 1bit 2bits Address 172 11099 5 0 PC link communication RS 485 without sum check communication 1 PC link communication with sum check Protocol selection ar High performance 0 PC link commun
174. NC 13 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main x unit to 100 OHM RSA RTS 14 t Connecting terminating resistors 2 details of the pin assignment refer to the following NC 13 1 manual RSB RTS 16 gt 227 Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller NC 17 mM CSA CTS 18 fe 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 NC 19 i gt GOT side RKC temperature controller side i terminal block Modular connector 2 CSB CTS 20 E RUP SDA1 1 D 2 T R B 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM SDB1 2 TRA x Connecting terminating resistors RDA1 3 i l 4 NC 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following i manual RDB1 4 i 5 gt User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 1 SDA2 5 3 SG 1 1 082 6 4 56 SG 4 RS 485 connection diagram 4 RDA2 7 GOT side RKC temperature controller side terminal block Modular connector 2 RDB2 8 Bae 5 SDA1 1 f 2 56 9 i i i i SDB1 2 1 T R A FG 10 1 1 beesesensescsssced RDA1 3 3 SG 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT unit to 100 OHM RDB1 4 4 N C Connecting terminating resistors SDA2 5 5 2 details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual SDB2 6 6 SG
175. NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 SG 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal m Connecting terminating resistors 4 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 l O a 2 O 2 5 a 5 lt o o x gt O LE 2 9 um o 2 2 O 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 25 8 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be within the maximum distance 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting sw
176. NC GXW2 J JA JAZ type programmable controller engineering GX Works2 software n indicates a version GX Simulator2 GX Works2 with the simulation function SWaD5C LLT J JV type ladder logic test tool function software package GX Simulator SW5D5C LLT V or later versions n indicates a version GX Developer VNDC OPEN JV SWoD5F GPPW V type software package n indicates a version GX LogViewer SWaDNN VIEWER J type software package n indicates a version PX Developer SWaD5C FBDQ J type FBD software package for process control indicates a version MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWoDNC MTW2 J indicates a version MT Developer SWoRNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series indicates a version SWaDNC MRC2 J type servo configuration software MR Configuratora o indicates a version MR Configurator MRE OSE type servo configuration software o indicates a version FR Configurator Inverter setup software FR SWo SETUP WJ n indicates a version NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator FP Parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWaD5CFXSSCJ n indicates a version FX3U ENET L Configuration tool FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL J R
177. NCOM 05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd is necessary 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 5 2 2 System Configuration 3 To connect to the EH 150 series connect to the serial port of the CPU module The module jack 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable EHRS05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd is necessary 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 2 System Configuration 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 2 3 2 RS 422 cable 2 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 Connection diagram GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 RDA 2 2M TXDP n GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side RDB 7 i TXDN CD NC 1 Eu spa 4 RXDP 5 RD RXD 2 2 SD SDB 6 RXDN SD TXD 3 gt 3 RD rsa 3 TXDG 5 ER DTR 4 0 7 RV2 DR rsp se s e SG 5 DR DSR 6 s cs a RS RTS 7 6 z cs cTs k 4 RS RXDG 5 9 a ME PES FG FG FG 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side CD NC 1 d 1 NC RD RXD 2 2 SD SD TXD 3
178. No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Specification range 0 to 99 4 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item FUJI MICREX F Device Information B 0000 Bele jeje 516 Device 0000 511F 213 o a Network Station No 0 gt 2 Item Information Set the device name device number and bit number The bit b be set only wh ifying the bit of Device e bi num er can be set only when specifying the bit o word device The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Information Displays device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of No the specified station No Device settings of FUJI FA PLC 1 When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of wor
179. Node Address so that it does not conflict with the Node Address of the PLC CPU on the DH 485 network For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following gt 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 3 1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix Communication driver gt EtherNet IP AB Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT EtherNet IP Communi Maximum Number g connectable Series M 4 cation Cable model segment Option device communication module 3 n Type length gt GT 1756 ENET 10Mbps 27 ControlLogix 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps Ethernet 100 Built into GOT 93 4 Shielded twisted pair cable 4 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps STP or unshielded e twisted pair cable UTP of When PLC GOT is 1 2 category 5 or higher 128 PLC 100 2 po d Shielded twisted pair cable 27 i a tLogi Eth t STP hielded 100 Built into GOT 8 ompactLogix uns ielde m Built into 23 When PLC GOT is 1 twisted pair cable UTP of TCP 32 GOTs or less category 3 or higher gt recommended to 16 or less for 1 PLC 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 destin
180. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range 0 5 to 0 8 N m Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation GT27 Only Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault GT27 Only TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor scr
181. OKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM amp Gateway Serve 88 Gateway Clent E FTP Server Fig Transfer F Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS Q Redundant 4 Item Description Range Parity Sum Check Set this item when change the 4800bps Retry Times eae 9600bps Timeout Time Sec nor transmission speed used for Delay Tme ms Transmission Bip 19200bps communication with the connected Speed 4 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the Data Bit Tbits 8bits connected equipment Default 8bits ooo Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity Parity check and how it is performed during ES 7 Select Common Controller Setting from the aia Eve du Default No Set whether or not to perform a sum check Sum Check during communication Yes or No 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Default Yes channel to be used from the list menu Set the number of retries to be performed M when a communication timeout occurs 3 Set the following items Retry When receiving no response after retries 0 to 5times Manufacturer YOKOGAWA the communication times out Controller T
182. ONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 17 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 6 Connecting to RB Series RB100 RB400 RB500 RB700 RB900 When using the converter Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 2224 Connection cable 2 1 888 0 Connection cable 1 Te t pL Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Sable mogel Max Model Communication Gabe modal Max Connection airs Connection Nb Option device Model equipment distance name Type distance diagram number diagram number GT 27 GT RB100 Built into GOT pto RB400 Use RS 485 RS 232 temperature RB500 connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m RB700 diagram 8 diagram 3 900 eor GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 18 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communication Type RB100 RB400 RB500 RS 485 RB700 RB900 cable model Mar Option device Model Connection diagram number distance P 27 ser H connection 1200m
183. P GT communication gt 14 3 2 GT GT IGT 1 SIMATIC 57 400 WRITE 3 14 3 1 Ethernet GT communication 3 14 3 2 OP SIMATIC 57 1200 Ethernet communication 371432 1 Not available with the Ethernet connection 14 2 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 Connectable Model List 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series When connecting to one PLC PLC Connection cable Connection cable Communication driver Crm SIEMENS S7 300 400 Series SIMATIC 57 300 400 HMI Adapter 1 MLFB 6ES7 972 0CA11 0XA0 Commu nication Type RS 232 Cable model Connection diagram number GT09 C30R20801 9S 3m or RS232 connection diagram 1 Max distance 15m GOT Number of connectable Option device Model equipment GT 27 Built into GOT 23 1 GOT for 1 HMI Adapter 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver Erm SIEMENS S7 300 400 PROFIBUS Connection cable PeO ITT H le fe PLC Connection cable GOT e umber o j
184. P2000 series ladder program to receive massages One scan at startup 00007 IF Sets parameters in the first scan after startup 0000 5 000001 true Low speed scan DWGL 5 000003 High speed scan DWGH 5 000001 0007 L STORE Sets the coil offset NL 2 Source 00000 Dest Dwo00008 1 0002 Sets the input relay offset NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DWO00009 0003 STORE Sets the input register offset 1 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest 0 00010 gt 1 9004 STORE Sets the holding register offset 9 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest DW00011 lt 0005 gt Write range LO Source 00000 lt Dest 0 00012 gt z 0006 gt STORE Write range HI NL 2 Source 32767 Write range 0 Write range LO lt Write range Dest 0 00013 X MW Maximum address value of register 2 2 om STORE Clears the system registers NL 2 Source 00000 Dest 0 00014 0008 gt STORE Clears the normal pass counter NL 2 Source 00000 Dest 0 00024 09 Clears the error counter NL 2 Source 00000 Dest 0 00025 Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 15 6 2 Serial Connection
185. P22 0S F3SP25 GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m F3SP28 KM10 0C 2 RS 232 or 15 4 F3SP35 552 88 232 connection diagram 1 F3SP38 F3SP53 GT15 RS2 9P F3SP58 F3SP59 1 for 1 PLC GT lt 27 Built into GOT 23 GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m 2 F3SP66 ee 10 053 RS 232 9r 15 4 232 connection diagram 1 97 gt GT15 RS2 9P E 2 2 2 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 7 2 Serial Connection When using the PC link module Connection cable Communication driver ITI YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Model name PC link module Commun ication Type Cable model Connection diagram number distance Option device connectable equipment F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC01 1N 11 1 11 1 12 1 RS 232 5 76 75 12 1 GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m or 2 5 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT GT15 RS2 9P GT 27 1 GOT for 1 PC link module F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3LC11 2N 1 RS 422 GT09 C30R40301 6T 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T 20m GT09 C300R40301
186. Param 00000 Normal completion 0013 IF 004 0014 INC 0015 NL 2 Dest DW00024 0015 END IF 0016 NL 1 Abnormal completion 0016 gt IF 0017 pmonoztzetue r 0017 gt INC NS Dest DWO00025 0018 gt STORE 2 Source DW00000 Dest DW00026 0019 STORE 0020 NL 2 Source DW00001 Dest DW00027 0025 gt END_IF 0026 NL 1 0026 END 0027 NL 1 device 6 16 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 1 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or 23005 or CP 9200SH or CP 312 or CP 317 Communication driver Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT TO Maximum Number of connectable Communication 3 i Model name a Cable model segment Option device Model equipment module A length MP 920 218 When PLC module GOT is 1 MP2200 100BASE TX The following shows the number MP2300 218 01 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or of PLCs for 1 GOT 23005 2181 02 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP 97 TCP 128 or less of category 5 or higher ave UDP 128 or less 100 Built into GOT CP 9200SH 218 10 Built into Shielded twisted pair cable STP or When PLC module GOT is 1 N unshielded twisted pair cable UTP The following shows the number CP 317 218TXB of ca
187. S 8 1 1 9 I 1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No 8 400 401 Signal names FB400 PF900 HA900 901 900 900 PF901 Communication Communication 901 1 2 5 25 25 13 25 44 SD TXD 26 26 14 26 45 RD RXD 27 27 15 27 46 Precautions when preparing a cable 5 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 6 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 7 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller side 9 30 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 3 2 RS 422 cable Differences in polarity between GOT and RKC temperature controllers The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is reversed between GOT and RKC temperature controllers Connect a cable according to the following connection diagrams Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular 2 RDA 2 LL m 4 T B RDB 7 k s T A SDA 1 gt 2 R B SDB 6 1 R A are le CSA 4 CSB o 1 SG 5 r F
188. S 232 45m Up to 1 temperature HA900 connection diagram 4 CT controller for 1 GOT HA901 27 MA900 GT15 RS2 9P 901 PF900 FIT Built into GOT HA400 HA401 Up to 31 temperature 900 RS 422 RS 422 nists RS 422 1000m controllers for 1 connection diagram 3 connection diagram 4 GT 3 HA901 27 GOT MA900 901 GT15 RS4 9S AG500 PF900 55 485 ion di 5 1200m Built into GOT PF901 connection diagram 5 HA400 HA401 FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m p to 31 temperature magoo 5 485 ss RS 485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL10 tm controllers for 1 MA901 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m AG500 RMC500 GT SA100 27 5 200 G8 RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 20 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Qc l O Qc Connection cable 3 a 2 LE Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 lt ti Interface Connection cable 1 Connection 4 Connection cable 3 GOT controlle
189. SCII 2 Write protect OFF not protect 12345678 3 2 5 ON not available OFF always 6 7 8 Operation OFF normal operation mode 7 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface Project setting configuration setting Set the setting with software for programming 7 3 7 Precautions Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC apparatus When a device outside the range is set on an object an Tem Sera Description 22 on the 2 error displa the system alarm 4 0 0 0 0 to Set the IP address of the 9 paye 1 address 255 255 255 255 connected Ethernet module For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual Host link service A 0 TCP IP Select the protocol to be used S 9 2 4 inthe port A of the host link 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 1 UDP IP Port No 12289 service via Ethernet Host link service A protocol command data type 2 O ASCII format Select the command data type to be used in the port A of the host link service via Ethernet When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the Port No 12289 System H
190. SG 5 SG 1 DR DSR e 6 SG 1 RS RTS 7 i 1 1 CS CTS _ 9 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 2 RS 232 connection diagram 2 RKC temperature controller side RS RTS 7 CS CTS GOT side Modular connector 1 cD 1 1 NC RD RXD 2 2 SD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 i 5 NC SG 5 SG DR DSR 6 CS l i 1 1 9 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 2 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 3 RS 232 connection diagram 3 Interface converter GOT side CD485 V side CD NC 1 oe T 1 CD 1 RD RXD 2 2 RXD 1 1 SD TXD 3 i 1 3 TXD 1 1 ER DTR 4 r 4 DTR 1 1 5 5 5 1 DR DSR 6 6 DSR 1 1 RS RTS 7 i 7 RTS 1 1 CS CTS CTS 1 N C 9 9 Ri 1 GT16 CD GT15 GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC 4 RS 232 connection diagram 4 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector 1 CD 1 RD RXD 2 k SD TXD SD TXD gt RD RXD ER DTR 4 i SG 5 DR DSR RS RTS 7 1 1 i 1 1 i SG 1 1 i CS CT
191. Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Negative Common GT15 DIOR Input Source Type Output External I O unit o For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Positive Common GT15 DIO Input Sink Type Output a 2 a 1 3 3 Conversion cable a gt Product name Model Specifications c O 5 lt a 1 3 4 Serial multi drop connection unit Product name Md Specifications GOT multi drop connection module 3 Mitsubishi Products 18 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 15 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 5 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit For the installation method of each unit refer to the User s Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are using For the method for installing a unit on another unit refer to the following gt User s Manual of GOT used When using a bus connection unit The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used 1 Wide bus units GT15 75QBUS 2 L GT15 75ABUS 2 L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface If a bus connection unit is install
192. T Model Cabl aa Number of connectable Pu bre ena dan M bd Option device Model equipment name ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 2 27 G8 RS 485 connection diagram 4 500m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 93 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 2 GT PXGs A temperat pto emperature RS 485 9 i i 500 GT15 RS4 TE PXG9 88 RS 485 connection diagram 5 controllers for 1 GOT PXH9 GT 27 83 485 connection diagram 7 500m Built into GOT 93 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 6 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configuration 5 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 3 RS 232 connection diagram 3 Interface converter side 5 3 1 RS 232 cable K3SC 10 1 ee ee OMNES SG Connection diagram RD RXD 2 k 6 RD 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 SDAD Interface ER DTR 4 converter side GOT side RC 77 SG 5 CD la DR DSR RD RXD 2 amp 2 RXD RS RTS 7 SD TXD __ a TXD CS CTS ER DTR 4 4 DTR NC 9 SG 5 5 SG FG DR
193. T ToolBox2 Robot program creation software 3D 11C WINJ MX Component Versiona SWaD5C ACT J SWoD5C ACT JA MX Component Mn indicates a version MX Sheet Versiona SWoD5C SHEET J SWaD5C SHEET JA MX Sheet n indicates a version QnUDVCPU LCPU Logging Configuration Tool B6 License key for GT SoftGOT2000 Abbreviations and generic terms License key QnUDVCPU LCPU logging configuration tool SW1DNN LLUTL J Description GT27 SGTKEY U 7 Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation AZBIL Azbil Corporation OMRON OMRON Corporation KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO El KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD JTEKT JTEKT Corporation SHARP Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation SHINKO Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Hitachi Ltd FUJI ELECTRIC FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC ALLEN BRADLEY Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE IP GE Intelligent Platforms KK LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd
194. TAdvanced Series ue Aone UM330 THV A1 UM331 SA100 UM350 SA200 0 351 051000 SLC500 20 UT130 SLC500 30 UT150 SLC500 40 UT152 SLC5 01 AB SLC500 UT155 SLC5 02 UP150 SLC5 03 UT2400 SLC5 04 UT2800 SLC5 05 UT32A 1 6 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series Model name 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A 1762 L24BWA 1764 LSP AB Control CompactLogix 1756 L 1756 11 1 1756 11 2 1756 11 3 1756 161 1756 1 62 1756 1 63 1756 1 55 12 1756 L55M13 1756 L55M14 1756 L55M16 1756 L55M22 1756 L55M23 1756 L55M24 1769 L31 1769 L32E 1769 132 1769 L35E Type GE Series 90 Model name IC697CPU731 697 772 697 782 697 928 697 935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 697 0788 IC697CPU789 697 790 2000 003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 2000 007 2000 028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD 120 IC200UDD212 20000 005 20000 006 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD1
195. TION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs using general purpose interface modules PEG Connection cable GOT SIUE Commun Number of connectable Model Pe ication cable model Max Option device Model equipment name interface Connection diagram number distance module GT GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 27 ST DECR GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 500m Built into GOT 23 general purpose interface GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m modules F70 NC1L RS4 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m or GT Use RS 485 connection diagram 2 ltd dicc den 500 GT15 RS4 9S general purpose interface 1 2 1 modules Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd Including the cable length of the option devices 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 7 4 2 System Configuration gt 2 E 2 2 o 4 2 3 Connecting to 1205 1405 155 For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following gt 4 7 Precautions When using general purpose interface modules Communication driver FUJI MICREX F 5 8 Connection cable 0 l PLC Connection cable GOT i Number of eneral purpose Model ae Caie model Max Option device Model n name 4 Connecti
196. TR 4 4 DTR SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 6 DSR RS RTS 7 7 RTS CS CTS 8 8 CTS NC 9 9 Precautions when preparing cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC GOT side side terminal block 1 SDA 1 Se gt RDA SDB 6 RDB RDA 2 SDA RDB 7 SDB SG 5 SG RSA 3 FG RSB 8 csa 4 k CSB 1 For the system terminal connect 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively 2 RS422 connection diagram 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side terminal block 1 side terminal block 1 RDA i RDA RDB i i RDB SDA SDA SDB i SDB SG SG FG e H FG 1 For the system terminal connect 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively
197. TRA TRA E 1m ii pi E i La 1102 86 SG La 11 SG 56 4 rt ret Le CREE Ve CE FEN NU ERR Combination module Combination module 1 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 3 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table l E 2 O Z 2 a E o Y 14 2 E 2 2 O Terminal Signal name ZTIO CB100 CB400 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 5 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 name PF901 900 901 900 901 RMC500 THv A1 4 X TIO 5 100 5 200 500 Communication 1 Communication 2 5 25 13 25 44 13 3 17 1 10 T R A 26 14 26 4
198. Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 5 14 1GOT connector specifications 4 FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For the procedure to set the terminating resistor referFor the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 2 gt 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 2 FUJI PLC side When connecting a FUJI PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 72 4 5 PLC Side Setting 4 12 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 Connection Diagram SDA SDB RDA RDB 44 GOT Side Settings 4 4 1 Setting communication j 4 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicau ing Make the settings according to
199. U1 to TU3072 Counter CU CU1 to CU3072 Specified bit of the following word devices Except Timer TP TS Counter CP CS Timer TP TP1 to TP3072 Timer TS TS1 to TS3072 Counter CP CP1 to CP3072 Counter CS CS1 to CS3072 File register B B1 to B262144 8 Data register D D1 to D8192 8 Common register R1 to R4096 Decimal 8 Index register V V1 to V256 Link register W W1 to W71024 Special register 2 Z1 to 2512 Converting bit devices into PURO Except M Counter CU Writing Is not possib e 2 Writing to con inuous devices is not possible 3 GOT cannot read or write data from to consecutive devices 7 4 2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 Series Device No Device name Setting range representa tion Input relay X X00201 to X71664 Output relay Y Y00201 to Y71664 Internal relay 1 11 to 165535 L00001 to 108192 110001 to L18192 L20001 to L28192 L30001 to 138192 pir L40001 to L48192 g L50001 to L58192 160001 to 168192 9 Decimal 170001 to 178192 a Common relay E E1 to E4096 Special relay 3 M1 to M9984 Timer TU TU1 to TU3072 Counter CU CU1 to CU3072 Specified bit of the following word devices Word device bit Excluding TS and CS Timer TP TP1 to TP3072 Timer TS TS1 to TS3072 Counter CP CP1 to CP3072 Counter CS CS1 to CS3072 Filer register B 9 B1 to B262144 D
200. URE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 17 RS 485 connection diagram 17 Temperature Temperature GOT side pn EA controller 1 controller RDA1 RXD1 10 1 SDB RDB1 RXD1 12 SDAC m SDA SDA1 TXD1 6 gt RDB SDB1 TXD1 8 BO a T m RDA SG 2 SG RSA RTS 14 le CSA CTS 18 T RSB RTS 16 CSB CTS 20 4 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4W NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Signal name Series iti 5 UT UP 2 UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A MES CES E UM UP55A product condition A SDB 23 21 301 407 501 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 SG 27 25 303 409 503 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r
201. WA GL PROGICB E pere a Retry Times 0 S k Gateway Standard 1 F RS422 485 Sf ser Sve 5 GL Startup Time Sec 3 iB Timeout Time Sec 3 a EET Speed BPS Host Address 1 E Delay Time ms 0 pee pem Tino Item Description Range Set this item when change the 4800bps T transmission speed used for 9600bps 22 communication with the connected 19200bps equipment 38400bps Default 19200bps 57600bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for commumcaton with 8bit fixed 9 the connected equipment Default 8bit 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Specify the stop bit length for gt menu Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed g 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Default 154 7 channel to be used from the list menu Specify whether or not to perform a lt Parit parity check and how it is performed fixed gt 3 Set the following items during communication ven fixed Manufacturer YASKAWA Default Even a Controller Type Set either of the following Set the number of retries to be YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 Retry DOR M a communication 0 to Stimes YASKAWA CP9200 H Default Otime YASKAWA CP9300MS MC compatible Specify the time period from the GOT gt YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH series Sirni startup until GOT starts the Sud I F Interface to be used communication
202. a INT 3 64 14815 2 Monitoring or writing is not possible the continuous device designation mode File type File No Element No Bit No b When setting an element address as a word device INT 3 64 File type Element No File No Setting by GT Designer3 Device 64 EM File type File No Element No 10 16 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 4 2 MicroLogix1000 1200 10 4 3 MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 1500 Series Series Device extended For details of this communication driver please contact our Device company No Device name Setting range z represen tation Bit B B3 0 0 to B255 255 15 Timer Timin bit ui T3 0 14 TT to 255 255 14 1 0 4 4 AB Control CompactLog IX i Timer bit T3 0 13 DN to T255 255 13 DN Device T No 9 Device name Setting range Counter Up represen 3 C3 0 15 CU to C255 255 15 CU Decimal 3 counter tation m Counter Down g al 3 C3 0 14 CD to C255 255 14 CD gt counter 2 BOOL BOOLO 0 to BOOL999 31999 Decimal gt Counter Fs n Completion bit j ae C3 0 13 DN to C255 255 13 DN o INT INTO O to INT999 999 lt 2 gt Integer N3 0 0 to N255 255 15 DINT DINTO 0 to DINT999 999 Decimal co 2 Bit B3 0 t
203. a RE EN SDB SDB1 TXD1 8 r4 r4 ra Lie SDA SG 2 E RDB RDB SDA2 TXD2 5 it m RDA 1 RDA 1 1 SDB2 TXD2 7 71 71 71 71 SG 1 1 1 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 x ME E i RDB1 RXD1 12 T il RSA RTS 14 ad ree RSB RTS 16 4 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 4 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Seres GREEN 073897 Signal Series iti 9 UT UP 05 UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition A FAC pu cupa e UM UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 SG 27 25 303 409 503 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product w
204. a and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 081199ENG C GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 2 MODEL GOT2000 CON3 SW1 E MODEL CODE When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission SH NA 081199ENG C 1401 MEE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan January 2014
205. al Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 N m to 0 48 N m with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 Nem to 0 48 Nem with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 10 Nem to 0 14 Nem with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit GT27 Only When closing the USB environmental protection cover fix the cover to the GOT by pushing the PUSH mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure GT27 Only Remove the protective film of the GOT When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed In addition for the models equipped with the human sensor funct
206. al modem OFF none 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit LC02 0N LC01 0N Front 5 1 Transmission speed setting switch Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following gt 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 2 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Data bit OFF bits 2 ON done OFF none arity ONS OFF ON even 11 3 OFF odd ET ON 2bits 4 Stop bit Ae EXT OFF 1bit ON done 5 Check Seu OFF none End ch t 6 T Mn al OFF none specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8
207. all be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expence The primary failure diagnosis will however be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction man
208. an be connected to 1 GOT TCP 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 128 or less recommended to 16 or less 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 11 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 3 2 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Controller Se CH1 AB Control Comp QD cH2 None 5 cH4 None 5 Control CompactLogix OER Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controler with a Ist of lower 3 Bk Gateway Standard 1 F Etheret Multi 2 p Communication TS Genel EtherNet IP AB Gateway 88 Gateway Client E GOT Ethernet Setting FTP Server Transfer F Property __ 1 Q Redundant GOT Net No 1 AD Station No Switch E n GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 a GOT Communication Port 5026 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 thernet Setting 2 C Host NetNo Staton Unit Type Address 1 1 1 AB EtherNet IP 1 1 1 1 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu Set the following items Manufacturer AB Controller Control CompactL ogi
209. ansparent function Except for 5011 No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 CH1 YASKAWA 20 2 Manufacturer YASKAWA xj CH3 None j CH4 None Controller Type YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH ash oe wien sette Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a ist of lower scree ed Gateway Vr Standard 1 F Ethernet Multi gt iras i Driver Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Gient Detail Setting FTP Server File Transfer F Property Value 3 A ante Stel EX GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port 5016 Retry Times Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethernet Setting sie e Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address 1 1 1 YASKAWA 1113 OK Cancel Apply Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the Net No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the Station connected Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank Type YASKAWA fixed YASKAWA fixed Set the IP address of the PLC side IP IP address 1 connected Ethernet module address Default blank Set the port No of the connected Port No Ethernet module 256 to 65534 Default 10500 Communication Select a communication protocol UDP TCP format Default UDP 1 Connection with the PLC is unavailable if the IP addre
210. ata register D D1 to D65535 Common register R R1 to R4096 g Index register V1 to V256 00001 to W08192 o Decimal P W10001 to W18192 W20001 to W28192 Link register W W30001 to W38192 W40001 to W48192 W50001 to W58192 W60001 to W68192 W70001 to W78192 Special register zy3 Z1 to 21024 Bit device word Converting bit devices into word Except TU and CU 1 Writing is not possible 2 Writing to continuous devices is not possible 3 GOT cannot read or write data from to consecutive devices 4 With STARDOM FA M3 F3SP59 only if communications that include the maximum device number 32767 or 65535 occurs system alarm 322 Dedicated device is out of range Confirm device range may be detected If such system alarm is detected do not use the last 15 bits 5 With STARDOM do not use B32768 or later Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 23 o 1 lt lt x gt 2 E o 2 2 o 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable 8 2 9 2 System 8 3 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 12 8 4 GOT Side 5 8 27 8
211. ation When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 3 Qc 2 2 LE Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 E T UU Connection Connection 5 ture cable 4 cable 2 Converter 2 Connection cable 3 GOT controller Max Number of Cable model Cable model distance Comm Cable model o Model eu Model ommu Max MEMINI equipment x Connection Connection nication Connection Option device Model wv name 1 distance diagram number diagram number Type diagram number W BF 28 0500 GT 2 27 0 5 Built into 5 W BF 01 0500 W BF 28 1000 GOT 23 12 2 425 0 5 1m Up to 31 400 2 W BF 01 1000 3 COM A RS 232 W BF 28 3000 45 temperature FB900 aaa 1 1000 z 3m m ST controllers diagram 3 W BE 01 300 or 27 for 1 GOT 3m Gs RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P connection diagram 2 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format 2 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 15 9 2 System Configuration When connectin
212. ation selected in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Network Select this for monitoring other controllers After selecting set the station number of the controller to be monitored NW No Set the network No Station No Set the station No Other Device settings of YASKAWA PLC when using CP 9200SH CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 Set the coil device MB as follows 1 When setting as a bit device Set the device using the format of word address DEC bit number HEX Device MB 04059 Device No Bit position HEX Word address DEC Device name 6 28 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set SR20001 to SR22048 Constant register 9 K1 to K4096 Device No Device name Setting range representation Coil 0 O1 to 063424 Input relay 1 97 I1 to 163424 8 D1 to D2048 Decimal Link D D10001 to D12048 D D20001 to D22048 Word device bit Specified bit of following word devices 4 register C Z1 to 731840 Holding register W1 to W28291 wy 24 SW1 to SW28291 R1 to R2048 R10001 to R12048 Decimal 2 Link register R20001 to R22048 5 R SR SR1 to SR2048 o SR10001 to SR12048 Bit device word Converting the following bit devices to words Link coil 1 Change the inpu
213. ation No switches Station No 0 to 99 ADDRESS 3 Connecting terminating resistors Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch 59 4 Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration switches 8 7 6 5 3 2 Em ON Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF speed 19200bps ON ON 1bit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF Tbits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing A m thod By switch ON 4 5 4 Connecting to FFK120A C10 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 Command setting type start stop A synchronization nonsequence format MODE RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 485 1 N n E 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even or Odd Parity bit Done None Stop bit bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station 72 0 to 99 Terminating resistor ON or OFF
214. ation connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 3 A length between a hub and node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 connectable EtherNet IP communication module differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 1756 ENET 10Mbps 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps ControlLogix5570 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps 5 number of the connectable for 1 PLC differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1 GOT TCP 128 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 64 or less recommended to 16 or less ControlLogix5570 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs c
215. available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 3 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 3 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 3 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT the screen of the GOT might flicker MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto from the GOT GT27 Only MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manu
216. ay the I O check screen by Main menu Self check I O check For GT15 GT14 GT11 Display the I O check screen by Main menu Debug amp self check Self check check For details on the I O check refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility Se 1 Touch CPU on the I O check screen Please select check channel Touching CPU executes the communication URS check with the connected PLC 7 o a 2 gt x O o 7 gt a o amp lt 72 Debug self_check Self 1 0 check 2 When the communication screen ends Please select check channel successfully the screen on the left is displayed 1 RS232 e ESTE CPU communication check No error 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 25 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet connection Confirming the communication state on Windows GT Designer3 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C gt Ping 192 168 3 18 Reply from 192 168 3 18 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C gt Ping 192 168 3 18 Request timed out 2 When using the PING Test of GT Designer3 Select Communication Communication c
217. bit 1or2 Start bit 1 Parity bit Even Odd None Channel selection Stand alone mode Interlocking mode Synchronization Asynchronous 300 600 1200 2400 4800 Transmission 9600 19200 38400 speed 300 600 1200 2400 4800 bps RS 422 485 9600 19200 38400 76800 1 For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following 737 User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC PLC 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Device settings of LS IS PLC 1 When setting bit device except timer and counter Set the bit device using the decimal number three digits and the hexadecimal number Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside Device the range is set other objects with correct device settings er B may not be monitored T Device number Device name HEX DEC Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Information 9 m E 12 6 1 LS Industrial Systems
218. ble 1151 2 2 System 2 3 Connection Diagram 2 7 GOT Side 5 2 9 PLC Side Setting xz a eda coo o ados op td 2 11 Device Range that Be Set 2 12 2 2 lt O z E 2 2 O 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock E Connectable model Refer to H 302 H 702 H 1002 2002 RS 232 cr Large sized Series er dos 271 23 537224 H 300 H 700 x H 2000 H 200 H 250 H 200 to 252 CUN MN H 252 89 232 27 23 397222 2528 H 252C H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H Series H 20DT GT OU board type o R3 232 271 23 gt 2 2 2 H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR EH CPU104 x EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH 150 series RS 232 37222 EH CPU316 O 27123 EH CPU516 EH CPU548 2 2 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 Connectable Model List 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 1 Connection to large sized H series Communication driver m HITACHI HIDIC HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 Co
219. cation interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 9 40 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 4 GOT Side Settings 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting YOKOGAWA temperature controller For details of RKC temperature controller refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Model name Refer to H PCP J 9 5 1 H PCP A H PCP B 9 5 2 Z TIO module Z DIO module 9 5 3 Z CT module Z COM module 9 5 4 CB Series 9 5 5 FB Series 9 5 6 RB Series 9 5 7 Temperature controller PF900 901 958 HA400 401 HA900 901 9 5 9 AG500 9 5 10 500 9 5 11 MA900 901 9 5 12 1 9 5 13 5 100 SA200 9 5 14 X TIO module 9 5 15 9 5 1 Connecting to H PCP J Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller Item Setting range Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication mode MODBUS Data bit 8bits Parity bit None Stop bit 1bit Unit address Oto F 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings
220. cation is not made Interval time 0 to 250 ms Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 2 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 10 Connecting to AG500 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 9 5 12 Connecting to MA900 MA901 Communication protocol MODBUS Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8 1 8bit None bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit St
221. ccording to the transmission speed setting on the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following E un 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 2 Set the Error Detection according to the sum check format setting on the GOT side For the sum check format setting on the GOT side refer to the following 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 10 10 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection Connecting to DH485 network via adapter 1770 KF3 Setting of Adapter Item Baud Rate Setting details 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps Parity Even Flow Control Disable No Handshaking DF1 Devi ios DF1 half duplex slave local mode Category Error Detection BCC DH 485 Baud Rate 19200bps Maximum Node 3 Address hee DH 485 Node sare Address in 1 Set the Baud Rate according to the transmission speed setting on the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 2 Setthe Error Detection according to the sum check format setting on the GOT side For the sum check format setting on the GOT side refer to the following c 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 3 For the Maximum Node Address set the same address as the Maximum Node Address on the DH 485 network 4 Setthe DH 485 Node Address according to the Host Address on the GOT side Set a unique DH 485
222. change the data Data Bit length used for communication with the 7bits 8bits connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu Specify whether or not to perform a parity None q heck and how it i rfi d duri 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Parity TERME T T channel to be used from the list menu Default Even Odd 3 2 Set whether or not to perform a sum Set the following items Sum Check check during communication Done None o Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Default No Controller type YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 Set the number of retries to be performed 5 Reti when a communication error occurs 0 to 5times UT2000 UTAdvanced ry I F Interface to be used Default 5 Driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 Timeout to time out 1 to 30sec UTAdvanced Time z Default 3sec 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer PUB host duas aia eo lt the GOT to which the temperature Controller Type I F and Driver are set Host Address controller is connected in the connected 1 to 99 Make the settings according to the usage network environment Default 1 gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings Set this item to adjust the transmission x Delay Time timing o
223. cimal number setting is the module address setting value 17 The GOT sid ti 0toF 33to48 S 77 Sice stanon Z CT number setting is the module Hexadecimal Decimal address setting value 33 The GOT sid ti 1 to 99 X TIO number setting is the module Decimal Decimal address setting value 1 CB FB RB The GOT side station PF AG HA 1 to 99 1to99 number setting is the same MA RMC Decimal Decimal the module address THV SA SB1 setting value The GOT side station B400 1 to 99 1to99 number is the module Decimal Decimal address setting value 1 or 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Specification Compatible station NO device 100 GD10 101 GD11 102 GD12 103 GD13 104 GD14 105 GD15 106 GD16 107 GD17 108 GD18 109 GD19 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 Setting range 1 to 99 For the setting other than the above error dedicated device is out of range will occur 9 CONNECTION TO RKC T
224. cipe function etc cannot be used d Notation method of the data registers with the bit specification The notation of the data registers with the bit specification differs between the GOT and the PLC The following shows the correspondence table Notation in GOT Notation in PLC DB1 DBWO bO DB1 DBX1 0 DB1 DBWO b1 DB1 DBX1 1 DB1 DBWO b7 DB1 DBX1 7 DB1 DBWO b8 DB1 DBX0 0 DB1 DBWO b15 DB1 DBX0 7 DB1 DBW2 b0 DB1 DBX3 0 DB1 DBW2 b7 DB1 DBX3 7 DB1 DBW2 b8 DB1 DBX2 0 DB1 DBW2 b15 DB1 DBX2 7 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 15 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set J 2 2 E O z E 2 2 O 57 200 Series lt pit gt CH1 SIEMENS 57 200 Device Information v 00000 Kind 7 9j D E F BIT tzela 15 Bence 00000 51197 BEE o 4 Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Device settings of SIEMENS PLC S7 200 series 1 When setting bit devices except Timer and Counter Set the device using the byte address DEC and the bit address 0 to 7 Description Device y 51197 amp Device name Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC c SIEMENS OP Ethernet
225. connection 1 26 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function 1 28 CONNECTIONS TO NON MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 271 1562522 ce o sao oct tco ien LC ide 2 2 System Configuration esnias ara dv 2 2 1 Connection to large sized 2 2 2 Connecting to 200 to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 2 9 Connection Dag aT eerie oreet d ec eves kn eque ea esse Ae TEE AEE E 2 3 1 232 cable iatis Dedit seid denda in did 2 3 2 R9 422 cable eit iet e RA It A ba 2 7 24 GOT Side Settings onere i dee a d nde e A 2 9 2 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 2 9 2 4 Communication detail 2 9 20 1 51 2 r t 2 11 2 6 Device Range that Can Be sse eene ttr eee Een nae 2 12 256 HETAGCRHPHIDIGEESGFIQS intei rb tete ence e tien Dx RUE PR CORE ERE LR 2 14 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 Connectable Model List cinere nente
226. connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector model GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27 9 pin D sub female GT23 M2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D2AC DDK Ltd fixed type GT15 RS4 9S 9 pin D sub female M2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M fixed type GT15 RS4 TE SL SMT3 5 10 90F BOX 2 Connector pin arrangement GT27 GT23 GT01 RS4 M GOT main part connector see from the front 5 1 o 9 6 9 pin D sub female 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 19 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector connector plug for coaxial cable and the cable NCAUTION Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable External conductor Outer sheath Insulating material Nut Washer Gasket Plug shell Contact Internal conductor T Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below Cable in use A 3C 2V 15 mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 10 mm 2 Pass the nut washer gasket and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor Cut this portio
227. cted to the GOT RS232 Setting To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232 mark the Enable the 5V power supply checkbox The RS232 setting is invalid when the CH No of I F 1 RS232 is 9 Extend I F Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT CH No 1 10 Set the CH No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 5 to 8 Used for barcode function RFID function remote personal computer operation serial A Used for the video RGB display function multimedia function external I O function operation panel function RGB output function report function hard copy function with a printer sound output function gateway function MES interface function and wireless LAN connection 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Channel No drivers RS232 Setting 1 Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 2 Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed
228. cun kr ea niea dno Es 7 8 72 02 PLO Sde Son pud e i 7 9 7 2 7 Connecting to CPU port D sub 9 pin conversion cable SIO port adapter cable 7 10 7 2 8 Connecting PC link module F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N 11 2 7 10 7 2 9 Connecting PC link module F3LC11 1F 12 1 7 11 7 2 10 Connecting PC link module LCO1 ON 02 0 7 12 7 2 41 Connecting to STARDOM sani ose at a 7 13 7 2 12 Precautioris iila e teca Ieri ee Piece 7 15 753 E ou ot itd 7 16 7 3 1 System configuration for connecting to 7 16 73 2 GOT Side Settings pede ined 7 17 7 9 3 PLOSE setling enne o ed cen E DRE Redes 7 19 7 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE01 5T 11 0 1 7 19 7 3 5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module 12 0 7 20 7 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface 7 21 7 3 7 Precattons tiene eine candids Gave 7 21 TA Device Range that Can Be 1 1 40 4 4 4 182 0001 1 1
229. d SIEMENS S7 Ethernet Set the network number and the station Other number of the controller monitored Device settings of SIEMENS PLC S7 300 400 series S7 Ethernet 1 When setting a bit device as a bit device Set the device using the format of byte address DEC bit address 0 to 7 Device M v 01287 Device name Device number Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC Be Set 2 When setting a bit device as a word device Set the device number For the device name setting enter W after the bit memory device name Device MW 0128 Device name Device number W added Setting with even number 3 When setting a data register Set the device using the format of data block DB data word DW Device DB 100 DBW 10000 Data word DW number Data block DB number 4 Precautions when setting devices a Notation method of the bit device The difference in bit memory notation between GOT and PLC is as follows Notation of GOT Notation of PLC 00007 00 7 Device name b Preparing to set a data register It is necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and sequence program before using a data register Setting more than one data block cannot be done for the data register c Object that cannot be set Timer current value T Only one device can be set for the write target of this device Therefore multiple devices such as using the re
230. d 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 29 o m lt 5 lt gt O E Z E o Z Z O o 6 4 5 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Series 3 Device No Device name Setting range representation Decimal Coil MB 000000 to MB65534F ke Hexadecimal 2 5 ee relay 41B 00000 to IB7FFFF Hexadecimal a n Specified bit of the following Word device bit word devices Input register 4 0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal 8 IW Molding register MWO to MW65534 Decimal 5 MW Bit device word Converting bit devices into word 1 Only reading is possible 2 CP 317 the bit access of word device MW is enabled for reading only 6 30 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC Connectable 115 1 7 2 Serial 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 16 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 22 7 l lt lt x gt Z E 2 Z O 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable model Refer to F3SP05 FA M3 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30
231. d category 3 or higher to 16 or less 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 4 Ifthe number of increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance o T 2 E D O z E 2 2 O 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 9 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 1200 series Ethernet connection type OP communication Communication driver Ethernet SIEMENS Gateway
232. d the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Higher Lower bO BI b14 b15 4 20 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 4 7 Precautions Station No settings of the PLC side In the system configuration the PLC with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 57 4 4 2 Communication detail settings System configuration of the PLC side GOT can communicate in a system configuration where NC1L PS4 FFU120B and FFK120A C10 are mixed When using FFK120A C10 the number of PLCs that can communicate is at most 6 units GOT clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with the station number set with the host address For details of host address setting refer to the following 57 4 4 2 Communication detail settings J 2 gt O z LE o 2 2 O o 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 21 4 7 Precautions 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 7 Precautions CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable 15 5 2 5 2 System 5 3 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 7 5 4 GOT Side 5 12 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 14 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 19
233. d device bit word devices input register holding register t ist IW0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal 2 5 2 Holding register MWO to MW32767 Decimal p MW Coil MB MBO to MB32767 Decimal Input relay IB 000 to IBFFF Hexadecimal 1 MB40960 to MB32767F is available for MP 940 only 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 3 Device No Device name Setting range representation Coil OB 000 to OB7FF 9 Hexadecimal 8 Coil OB 000 to IB7FF Word device bit Specified bit of following z word devices Input register IWOO to IW7F IW Hexadecimal Output register OWO0 to OW7F g OW gt 5 Data register DWO to DW2047 gt 5 DW 20 200 to 202047 Decimal Common register MWO to MW7694 MW Bit device word Converting bit devices into word 1 Setting is available only when CP 9200H is used 2 To use data registers of CPU 1 during operation of CP 9200 copy them to MWO to 7694 3 During operation of CP 9200H specify the reference No and quantities so that they do not cover both OB and IB compatible Device No Device name Setting range EU 2 representation Coil OB OBO to OB1023 g Decimal 3 Input relay IB IBO to 1023 a Word device bit Specified bit of ips following _ word devices Input register 1 10 to 163 Data register M MO to M2047 im register 8046563 Bit device word Converting bit devices into wor
234. d number DEC bit No 0 to F HEX Device B 000 225 Bit Device No DEC 2 When setting a word device For direct access W24 and user file W30 to W109 W9 set as follows Device 30 fF 0000 Word number File number Device name 4 6 1 FUJI MICREX F Series Device No Device name Setting range ii representation relay B B0000 to B511F Auxiliary relay M M0000 to M511F Keep relay K K0000 to KO63F Special relay F0000 to F125F Decimal Hexadecimal A0000 to A045F A Differential relay D D0000 to DO63F Link memory L 0000 to L511F ia Timer output a T000 to T511 0 015 T 9 Timer output Decimal T512 to 999 0 15 Counter output C C000 to C511 Specified bit of the following word devices Word device bit Direct access user file relay WB WBO000 to WB511 i Auxiliary relay WM WMO000 to WM511 Keep relay Wk WK000 to WK063 S Decimal 5 Special relay WF WFO00 to WF125 Annunciator relay WAO00 to WA045 WA 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 19 4 6 Device Range that Can Be Set J 2 gt O z E o 2 2 O Device No Device name Setting range
235. dads 9 pin KM10 0C conversion cable 7 2 7 SIO port adapter cable KM10 0S F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N 7 2 8 F3LC11 2N PC link module F3LC11 1F 7 2 9 F3LC12 1F LCO01 0N 7 2 10 LC02 0N STARDOM 7 2 11 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection lt gt lt o x 5 O z E o z Z O o 7 2 7 Connecting to CPU port D sub 9 pin conversion cable SIO port adapter cable 7 2 8 Connecting PC link module F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N Setting of PLC CPU Make the PLC CPU settings displaying Configuration Communication Settings with the program development tool or the ladder programming tool Item Set value Set the communication mode of the CPU transmission speed and data format Set the transmission speed and data format according to settings of the transmission speed data length parity and stop bit on the GOT side For details on these GOT side settings refer to the following 7 2 5Setting communication interface Communication settings Transmission speed and data format Transmis Stop sion Data bit Parity bit speed Communication 9600 8bit E 1bit mode 0 bps Communication 9600 Communication mode 1 bps 8bits None 154 4 mode Communication 19200 8bit E 1bit mode 2 bps yen Communication 19200 8bit N 1bit mode 3 bps ve S Communication 38400 8bit E 1bit mode 4 bps m o
236. data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a Parit parity check and how it is performed us y during communication Odd Default Odd Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No of the GOT to which the PLC is Host Address connected in the connected network Default 00 Set this item to adjust the Delay Time transmission timing of the 0 to 300ms communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 11 5 PLC Side Setting GE PLC For details of GE PLCs refer to the following manuals GE PLC user s Manual 11 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro Communication set
237. de refer to the following 5 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 1 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 57 7 2 5 m Communication detail settings Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Data bit T OFF 7bits 2 ON done OFF none Parity 3 ON even OFF odd ON 2bits 4 Stop bit iid OFF ibit ON done 5 Check ze OFF none End ch t 6 7 OFF none specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8 OFF 3 Station No switch F3LC11 2N only Rotary switch 1 Station No 10 s digit Station No 2 1 s digit 1 4 Terminator switch F3LC11 2N only TERMINATOR 2 4 WIRE OFF Settings 4 WIRE Description Resistor connected 4 wire type 7 2 9 Connecting PC link module F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F Side view indicated by A With right side cover removed 1 Transmiss
238. do bec dese tein abbia betae co ade 5 20 PreGautions E 5 20 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Connectable Model List 0 cceceeeecnccceeeesanecedeeeeneceeeedbsaeecedeesnadeedebenaedeed nad dann dd ad dd dnd 6 2 Serial Conrectlon 6 3 6 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or 1 0 6 3 6 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or 2 2 2 1 6 4 6 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H or PROGIC 8 6 5 6 2 4 System configuration for connecting to 940 000 6 7 6 2 5 System configuration for connecting to CP 9200SH CP 317 6 8 6 2 6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200 MP2300 or 23005 6 9 6 2 7 Connection Diagrarm c ccccccecccceesesenedenesneesceceeseneceaneeenenedaseenedcaceeeneneennensnenedeseeseenecenaeetene 6 10 6 2 8 GOT Side Settings nca ead ud add 6 13 6 2 9 PLO Side Settings eec ia deat cee 6 14 Ethernet CONMSCHON E 6 17 6 3 1 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 or MP2200 MP2300 23005 or CP 9200SH or CP 312 or 7 6 17
239. e 3 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 4 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 4 connector specifications 5 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 9 11 3 Connection Diagram zi o O z E 2 2 O 11 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 11 10 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 Communication terminating resistor Communication GOT side Module 120072 Module fhe ri TERM S uy we or a i ha 24 3 24 SDA 1 RE 25 25 RD B SDB 6 RP 13 r 13 RD A RDA 2 21 SD B RDB 7 8800 9 SD A SG 5 i 7 7 OV Rsa 3 LL i 9 RTS A 4 STUDI 11 CTS A RSB STO 22 RTS B CSB 9 i STS 23 23 CTS B Ia De M SHLD 1 B pm 1 SHLD 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module
240. e Set this item when change the Transmission transmission speed used for 4800bps Speed communication with the connected 9600bps equipment 19200bps Default 19200bps Specify the adapter address station 4 No of the PLC that the GOT will Adapter Address monitor in the connected network nine Default 0 Specify the host address station No 4 of the adapter to which the GOT is Host Address 1 to 31 connected in the connected network Default 1 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 2 AB MicroLogix Property _ u _ Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Sum Check Done Sum Check Type BCC Adapter Address 0 Host Address 1 Item Description Range Set Bis tem when change the 4800bps Transmission wth the connected 9800695 Speed eduiprient 19200bps Default 19200bps Specify the format in which the sum check is performed during Sum Check communication when performing sum BCC CRC16 check Default BCC Specify the adapter address station 4 No of the PLC that the GOT will Adapter Address monitor in the connected network ds Default 0 Specify the host address station No TRES of the adapter to which the GOT is 0 to 63 connected in the connected network Default 1 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address host address
241. e GOT r Communicate with GOT cor write Read verication GOT Information Get GOT Information Wie pata Wie Qpton GOT Type zx GOT Name Data Size ROM 1354 KB RAM 2977 KB Free Space Capacity 1 KB KB oO GOT Destination Drive C Built in Flash Memory What is package data Package data are project data that work in GOT and system applications data required for GOT operation Communication Configuration Communication Path PC USB GOT Close 1 Select Communication Write to GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Write tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Project data OS radio button of the Write Data 4 a desired standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and Communication Settings and click the GOT Write button 1 12 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing Confirm if the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designers
242. e simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection GT27 Only The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the
243. ecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series 10 6 10 2 4 Connection Diagrami eee 10 7 10 2 5 GOT Side Settings oa dae dee ated ee el 10 8 10 26 PEG Side Sting xis s iid nae Den rep in 10 10 10 3 Ethernet Connection eee ecciesie denda dde edades pda 10 11 10 3 1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix 10 11 10 3 2 GOT Side Settings irere arei eei esa a e ee eda ede 10 12 10 3 3 PEG side Settilig i d ee a oett ose aet e i eta tio te bu use een iet a dg 10 14 10 3 45 Precautioris c iit te pH Dont desert on tete gu cine Doi o od ade dtes ea foes 10 14 10 4 Device Range that Can Be 5 10 15 10 4 1 AB SL C500 inen Pe e A acer eens 10 16 10 4 2 AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 5 10 17 10 4 3 MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series Device 10 17 10 4 4 AB Control Compacthogix rieren 9 nta tede ia deu e get eu de 10 17 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model Bist 1 nri Pere D een tH das n PE cedo e dedos 11 2 1122 System Configuration eirca Lama x ce P o aa raa dud 11 3 11 2 1 Connect
244. ection diagram 5 Q 1 ERES 1200m Built into GOT FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m 1200m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 1 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m RS 485 connection diagram 6 Up to 31 temperature CB RS 485 controllers for 1 GOT mang aS RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE l E 2 O 2 a gt E o Y 2 2 E 2 2 O 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 13 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 5 Connecting to FB series 100 FB400 or 900 When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communication Cable model Max DIE ms connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance p equipment GT 27 Built into GOT 93 FB400 Up to 1 temperature 1 U x FB900 RS 232 GRS 232 connection diagram 4 15m controller for 1 GOT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 54 Use communication 1 for the communication format 9 14 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configur
245. ed in the 2nd stage or above the unit cannot be used Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit Bus connection unit Serial communication unit 2 Standard size bus connection unit GT15 QBUS and GT15 ABUS A bus connection unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit 1 16 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Install a MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit or CC Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage Example When installing a MELSECNET H communication unit and a serial communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit Serial communication unit MELSECNET H ommunication unit Serial communication unit When using a serial communication unit A serial communication unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Serial Serial communication communication a 2 gt o 7 gt a
246. een such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit mus
247. eene nemen ennt 12 11 12 6 1 LS Industrial Systems 12 11 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Model List Lt e e RE e OR I ae ed redi etna 13 2 13 2 System Conflguration QM nde ecd dede eut de ina 13 2 13 2 1 Connecting to Flexi 13 2 13 3 GOT 5146 5 MM 13 3 13 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication 13 3 13 3 2 Communication detail 13 3 134 PLC Side Setting enosti en uv e pda adv uid 13 4 13 4 1 Connecting to Flexi a sa innen 13 4 13 5 Device Range That 13 5 13 5 1 SICK Safety Controller SICK Flexi 13 6 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 era UR eut 14 2 14 2 5 14 3 14 2 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400
248. el Max ication i Option device Model name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type GT 27 Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m or F70 FFK120A C10 RS 232 15 5 232 connection diagram GT 27 1 1 GT15 RS2 9P Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C 485 interface capsule Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 System Configuration CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC When connecting to multiple PLCs using RS 232C 485 interface capsules Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Made interface ication cable moga Max Option device Model equipment name Connection diagram number distance capsule Type GT 27 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 2 2 GT GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 500m gt Builtinto GOT 23 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m F70 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m or 485 connection diagram 1 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs RS 232C 485 interface GT 27 capsules 500m GT15 RS4 9S 4 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 6 4 CONNEC
249. el Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name Se GREEN es Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 23 26 24 5 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal C Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 7 RS 485 connection diagram 7 GOT side EE Temperature controller SDA1 TXD1 6 SDB1 TXD1 8 m m SG SG 2 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 La RDA1 RXD1 10 RDB1 RXD1 12 RSA RTS 14 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4 2 RSB RTS 16 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series ULIS UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 RSA 29 4 27
250. el code SH 081201ENG Manual name GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware Manual number Model code SH 081194ENG 1D7MJ5 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility SH 081195ENG 1D7MJ6 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Monitor B2 List of Manuals for GT Designer3 GOT1000 Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 GOT 1000 SH 081196ENG 1D7MJ7 Abbreviations and Generic Terms The following shows the abbreviations and generic terms used in Help GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT2712 S GT2712 STBA GT2712 STWA GT2712 STBD GT2712 STWD GT2710 S GT2710 STBA GT2710 STBD GT27 GT2710 V GT2710 VTBA GT2710 VTWA GT2710 VTBD GT2710 VTWD GT2708 S GT2708 STBA GT2708 STBD GOT2000 Series GT2708 V GT2708 VTBA GT2708 VTBD GT2310 V GT2310 VTBA GT2310 VTBD GT23 GT2308 V GT2308 VTBA GT2308 VTBD GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series GOT900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series GOT800 Series 2 Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms GOT 800 Series Description Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit
251. erature controller in TATA ta RSB EI E TIT MUT 1 RSB ii 11 RSA ti ti 3 T4 T4 RSA SG 11 56 i i 5 11 1 1 5 GND US T des t 4 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sionalfname GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series g UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UTS55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 5 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 on the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 10 RS 485 connection diagram 10 GOT side 4 Temperature controller Temperature controller 1 1 i 1 1 RSB es SDA1 1 L L RSB SDB1 2 ri ri Ec RSA RDA1 3 E 5 ET 4 4 E T SDA2 5 1 i 4 5 2 EN N Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4W 2 RDA2 7 pd 1
252. erter Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Te t RS232C RS485 PE Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter 1 Number of connectable Cable model Max Model Commun Cable model Max i Series Connection diagram ication Option device Model equipment distance name Connection diagram number distance number Type 27 Built into GT GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT z Up to 16 UT2000 a 1200m ML2 RS 232 temperature h diagram 5 232 connection GT controllers diagram 1 27 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 8 6 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Communication driver Lim YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable Te ti d Connection cable GOT 2 Number of connectable ommun f e ment Series ication Gabe model MEN Option device Model T Connection diagram number distance ype GT GT09 C30R4
253. etting switch resistor setting switch Terminating Switch No istor e Terminating Switch No resistor 1 2 CHE 2 s 1 2 resistor 1 2 9 100 OHM ON ON 1 E Lm 100 OHM ON ON Disable OFF OFF Disable OFF OFF 1 The default setting is Disable 1 The default setting is Disable For RS422 485 communication unit For GT2710 V o 2 gt z o Y 2 a rd a 3 a 52 a a H Q Q zr MP i ii HELIN MI 7 pong 5 Terminating resistor setting switch NASA oem Rear view of RS 422 485 communication unit Ud 11 a Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover For GT2310 V 5 S
254. evice 3 Set the available write range for the holding registers 4 When connecting to multiple GOTs set channel numbers individually for each GOT 5 Set the Dev Typ of the message receive function lt MSG RCV gt to 00016 for the built in MP2300S Ethernet connection or the Ethernet port connection of 218IF 02 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 23 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 5 PLC side setting CP 9200SH series CP 312 CP 317 Settings by DIP switch series 1 Settings for 218TXB Set the DIP switch SW2 as follows N O ZINAR hoe YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following _ manuals INIT gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual TEST ON OFF Parameter settings Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool Setvalue Settingirange ON Extended mode 13 channels up to 1024 words 1 Settings for CP 218IF Moge Selection ON OFF Basic mode 10 channels Item Set value ea 21 Not used OFF Module Type CP 218 Transmission ON 10Mbps CPU Numb 01 10 100 l Speed OFF OFF 100Mbps Circuit Number 01 F H Transmission OFF ON Full duplex mode Hot Swapping Mode OFF Half duplex mode ON Start up by the default IP 125 CNO 03 CNO 04 CNO 05 address and the engineering port No INIT Initial Starti OFF Local Port 10500 10501 10030 Startup OFF Start up by the IP address Node IP i i 192 168 001 018 192 168 001 020
255. f RS 422 cable 2 must be 300m or less The maximum length of RS 422 cable 1 differs according to the specifications of the YASKAWA PLC side For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 73 1 4 1 connector specifications c YASKAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b YASKAWA PLC side When connecting a YASKAWA PLC to a GOT connect a terminating resistor to the YASKAWA PLC if required gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual 6 12 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 8 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment E Transmission Speed BPS 19200 2 Data Bit 8 bit a ce Stop Bit 1 bit Manufacturer YASKAWA Parity Even Controller Type YASKA
256. f data length parity bit and stop bit 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Selectthe unit address without overlapping with that of other COM PORT1 COM PORT2 h s 22 Setting DIP switches Data bit configuration 2 Make the settings of transmission speed data length OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit parity bit and stop bit b COM PORT3 5 3 7 5 Data bit configuration Top section OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Rear view of module mainframe with mother block removed 1 Transmission speed settings 3 Communication speed OFF ON 9600bps ON ON 19200bps 2 Settings of data length and parity bit 1 Data bit configuration OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Setting range 0 to F 9 42 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO Z DIO Z CT Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Unit address setting switch Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit 8bits Parity None Data bit 8bits Parity Even Data bit 8bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Data bit co
257. f the communication request from 0 to 300ms Click the OK button when settings are completed the GOT Default 5ms Select the communication format z POINT Default 1 Format 1 I The settings of connecting equipment can be Accessible to GREEN UT100 UT2000 confirmed in I F Communication Setting Format UTAdvanced Series 1 2 gt For details refer to the following Format 2 Z 7 Accessible to GREEN UT2000 37 1 1 2 communication setting UTAdvanced Series Not accessible to o UT100 Series 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 27 8 4 GOT Side Settings 1 Format When connecting to UT100 Series specify the format 1 When connecting to only GREEN UT2000 UTAdvanced Series specifying the format 2 is recommended 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 8 28 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 4 GOT Side Settings 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting POINT 8 5 1 Connecting to GREE
258. face converter Temperature controller aCe controller ra 1 SDA 1 RDAC RDA SDB 2 T RDB RDA 3 r2 SDA RDB 4 E E SDB SG 5 T SG GND 6 o WU EN xc 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name Ecos UT Pin No Pin No RDA 26 24 RDB 25 23 SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 SG 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Turnon the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 RS 485 connection diagram 2 Temperature GOTside 7 27 Temperature controller E controller 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 EHA Li Li lt SDB X RDB1 RXD1 12 R n SDA SDA1 TXD1 6 N gt A RDB SDB1 TXD1 8 Qo E RDA 56 2 e E SG RSA RTS 14 t T GND CSA CTS 18 VE 4 Ad RSB RTS 16 xn 2 CSB CTS ag aml Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 E SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 Lu RDB2 RXD2 11 a NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 lt 19 1 Pin No of
259. fer to the respective device manual 1 3 1 Communication module Product name Model Specifications GT15 QBUS For QCPU Q mode moton controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode GT15 QBUS2 For QCPU Q mode moton controller CPU Q series Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS For FABACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS2 For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection unit Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode GT15 75QBUSL For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit slim mode GT15 75QBUS2L For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 2ch unit slim mode GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim mode For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim mode Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin male GT15 RS4 9S RS 422 485 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin female GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 485 serial communication unit terminal block MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical loop unit GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical loop unit MELSECNET H communication unit used in the MNET 10 mode GT15
260. fixed Communication protocol MODBUS MODBUS data 0 to 255 ms Extension time Data bit 8bit fixed Data bit configuration Parity bit None fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 1 to 994 Slave address z Interval 5 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Setthe extension time for the data interval time in the MODBUS communication which is lower than 24 bit time Set when the data time interval exceeds 24 bit time 3 Select the device address without overlapping with that of other units 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 5 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary Device address 2 1 to 99 Slave address 9 Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings of the GOT side with the temperature controller settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 53 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of t
261. for 24VDC sensor 8 9 4 J a E 2 2 3 gt E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 When connecting directly Communication driver Com YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable Te t NI Connection cable GOT Number of connectable commun Cable model Max equipment Series ication Option device Model Connection diagram number distance Type GT 27 GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m EN GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m Built into GOT 23 GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m 1200 83 485 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS4 98 4 wire type FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5 7 485 connection diagram 17 1200 FA LTBGT2RACBL 40 UT32A 4 wire type 7 UT35A FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m UT55A 8 485 2 controllers UP35A 2 55 485 connection diagram 4 4200m PET 4 wire type 2 GT FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 7 27 555 RS 485 connection diagram 18 1200m FA LTBGT2RACBL40 EA 2 wire type FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2 7 GT 27 5 52 5 485 connection diagram 8 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m Built into GOT GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m 1200m or 7 UM33A
262. g Informatio amp Bk Gateway p Communication El Gateway Serve 88 Gateway 75 E FTP Server Transfer F Property 5 Q Redundant x Transmission Speed BPS AD Station No Switch Stop Bit Parity Retry Times Controller Type Ls Industrial Systems MASTER Standard F RS422 485 LS Industrial Systems 5 Timeout Time Sec Host Address Delay Time ms 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer LS Industrial Systems Controller LS Industrial Systems MASTER K I F Interface to be used Driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment gt 12 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 12 communication setting Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 38400 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 H
263. g range 0 to F Tas ANIZ Nu eee ges any NA aS NU OT aS eA 273 i 4 Interval time settings Configure the interval time setting using the RKC communication setting tool WinPCI After the communication is started set as follows Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZTIO rkc cfg Interval time 0 to 250ms For the using method of RKC communication setting tool refer to the following gt RKC communication setting tool user s manual 9 5 4 Connecting to Z COM 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol Host MODBUS Data bit 8bits fixed Parity None fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed Unit address OtoF Interval time 0 to 250ms Dip switch settings valid invalid vaig 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other units 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Dip switch 3 y Mus TA oW o E gt COM OFF ON PORT1 h COM1 COM PORT2 B COM H
264. g to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485 V Communication driver i RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model Communication Cable model Connection HC Connection CHEM Option device Model equipment distance name Type distance diagram number diagram number S GT Built into GOT EX pto FB100 Use RS 485 RS 232 temperature FB400 connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m controllers for 1 FB900 diagram 8 diagram 3 GT15 RS2 9P 74 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS 422 Communication driver Liem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 8 8 ERA Connection cable 1 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 2 Temperature controller Model Communication name Type FB400 FB900 RS 422 1 2 9 16 Cable model Connection diagram number RS 422 connection diagram 3 Cable model Connection diagram number RS 42
265. gister E E000 to EFFF System register S 1 5000 to SBFF Transfer register J J000 to JFFF Receive register Q Q000 to QFFF Specified bit of the following word devices One shot timer up down counter function data Word device bit register function work register extended function work register backup work register backup long word work register External input XW XW000 to XWFFO External output YW YW000 to YWFFO Internal register RW RW000 to RWFFO 5 Extended internal register 000 to MWFFO Hexadec S MW v imal Extended internal register Word device Device name One shot timer UW Up down counter CW Setting range UW000 to UWOFO 00 to CWFO Global link register GW Event register EW GW000 to GWFFO 000 to EWFFO System register sw 000 to SWBFO Transfer register JW JW000 to JWFFO Receive register QW QW000 to QWFFO On delay timer current 000 to TC1FF value TC On delay timer set value TS000 to TS1FF TS One shot timer current value UC UCO000 to UCOFF One shot timer set value US 05000 to USOFF Up down counter current value 2 00 to CCFF Up down counter set value CS CS00 to CSFF Function data register DW 4 5 DW000 to DWFFF Function work register FW000 to FWBFF Extended function work register Lwwy4 5 LWW0000 to LWWFFFF
266. gs Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value start stop synchronization nonsequence format 9600bps 19200bps MODE Transmission speed Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even or Odd Parity bit Done None Stop bit ibit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station No 72 0 to 99 Terminating resistor ON or OFF 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 3 ON the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting Switch MODE switch RS 485 station No switches m ao Cs Tess Terminator switch Fe Character configuration E switches 9 Front view Rear view 1 Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch MODE Switch position Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format 2 RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 485 1 N 2 Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 st
267. gs according to the usage environment 237 3 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 communication setting 3 6 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 4 GOT Side Settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Retry Times Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 8bits Specify whether or not to perform a Parit parity check and how it is performed EE y during communication Odd Default Odd Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Btimes error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the
268. h Flr 4 Setting of Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration switches L TJ 8 7 6 CO 4 3 C2 1 ON Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2738 7247S disable OFF OFF OFF 1bit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 7bits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing mathod By switch ON 4 18 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 5 PLC Side Setting 5 Transmission speed settings Make the settings using the baudrate setting switches 28g Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps OFF OFF speed 19200bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 4 5 5 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 1 No 15 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification Specify the station
269. he GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 47 l E Z O Z 2 a E o Y 14 Z E o 2 2 O 9 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Dip switch Item Communication speed Setting range 9600bps 19200bps Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8 1 8bit None 1bit 8 2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Device address A ON 1234567 8 4 Slave address 14093 m Switch position Setting item Set value Interval 9 0 to 250 ms 1121312 151517 8 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Communicati 9600bps ON OFF 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of 19200b
270. hment 87 GT15 60ATT 77 B5 Software 1 Software related to GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 Description SW1DNC GTW3 J SW1DND GTW3 J SW1DNC GTW3 E SW1DND GTW3 E SW1DND GTW3 C GT Designer3 Version1 Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 GOT1000 series GT Designer3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3 GT Designer3 GOT1000 Screen drawing software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3 GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000 GOT 1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT2000 Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series DU WIN 2 Software related to iQ Works Abbreviations and generic terms Screen drawing software FX PCS DU WIN for GOT F900 series Description iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works n indicates a version 3 Other software Abbreviations and generic terms Description SWaD
271. i Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 4 10 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 System Configuration 4 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 4 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side D sub 9 pin PLC side CD 1 4 RS RD RXD 2 2 SD SD TXD 3 gt 3 RD ER DTR 4 gt 6 DR SG 5 gt SG DR DSR 6 20 ER RS RTS 7 gt 8 CD CS CTS 8 1 5 CS 9 1 FG Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 7 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 3 FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 Connection Diagram 4 11 o J 2 gt O z LE o 2 2 O o 4 3 2 RS 485 cable 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 GOT side PEN MC PLC side EE _ PLC side ed j E ox HH ELI soe fi J so sf f RSA 3 TR CSA 4 k T CEN RSB 8 9 4 1
272. iagram 1 GOT side SIEMENS PLC side CD 1 poe 1 CD RD RXD 2 3 TXD SD TXD i 2 RXD ER DTR 4 DSR SG 5 5 56 DR DSR 1 4 DTR RS RTS 7 CTS CS CTS RTS 9 e 9 FG 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 2 1 4 1 connector specifications SIEMENS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SIEMENS PLC side For details refer to the SIEMENS PLC user s manual 2 T 2 E D O z E 2 2 O 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 5 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacturer SIEMENS SIEMENS 57 300 400 Controller Type 5 8 Gateway d Standard I F RS422 485 p Communication LL Gateway Serve 88 Gateway Client SIEMENS 57 300 400 FTP Server Fig File Transfer F Property 15 Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS 38400 Station No Switct Data Bit Adapter Address Host Address 0K cancel 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Contro
273. ial port module HITACHI IES PLC user s Manual 2 8 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 3 Connection Diagram 2 4 Side Settings 2 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 8 Controller Setting CHERITACHT AD Netware Set the channel of the connected equipment CH2 None tanufacturer HITACHI controller Type HITACHI HIDIC H fetwork Duplex Settr Routing Informatio 9 56 Gateway Communication 5 Gateway Serve a2 eer Cent etal Setting FTP Server Transfer F Property amp 9 Jeera M Transmission Speed BPS jon No Switct SE Standard 1 F RS422 485 HITACHI HIDIC H Parity Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Station No Selection C ox cancel Apply 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer HITACHI Controller Type HITACHI HIDIC H I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the following HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 2 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button whe
274. ication 485 without sum check 7 icati 1 PC link communication with sum check 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 5 lt o x gt 2 9 2 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 29 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 5 2 Connecting to UT100 Series Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 2 Communication mode settings Make this setting by operating the communication mode select DIP SW Switch position Communication mode ON T Item Set value ON PC link communication mode l OFF Transmission speed 9600bps Data bit 7bits 8bits Parily bii Even odd none 3 A setting of the station No Make this setting by operating the station No select Stop bit 1bit 2bits Rotary switch Address 172 1 to 99 Switch position Station No uu 0 PC link communication without sum check Frotgcol selection 1 PC link communication with sum check 0 1 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 1 2 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 2 3 3 4 8 5 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 4 5 5 6 Communication settings 6 7 Make the communication settings using setting 7 8 switches 8 9 9 10 Item Set value A 1
275. ication Port 5015 Eth Si Transparent Port No 5014 y pua gt Host Net No Station Unit Type Address 1 1 1 AB EtherNet IP 1 1 1 1 2 Item Description Range 9 Item Description Set value Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to EI GOT IP Address The host is displayed The host is Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Host indicated with asterisk Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router 0 0 0 0 to If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Station Ethernet module 1 to 64 Set the network No of the connected Net No Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected Subnet Mask Default blank Set the router address of the CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC AB EtherNet Default default gateway where the nd is 0 0 0 0 to Type AB EtherNet IP fixed IP fixed Gat connected Only for connection 255 255 255 255 ateway via router Set the IP address of the connected Default 0 0 0 0 IP address Ethernet module address 1024 to 5010 Default blank uu Set the GOT port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 Port No 44818 fixed 44818 fixed SW BS WA E communication Except for 5011 Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed Default
276. ing manuals gt FUJI PLC user s Manual 4 5 1 Connecting to NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting Switches Item Set value MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Model name Refer to Mesas NV1L RS2 interface card 4 5 1 NC1L RS2 General purpose interface NC1L RS4 4 5 2 module FFU120B 4 5 3 RS 232C 485 FFK120A C10 4 5 4 interface capsule 4 14 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 5 PLC Side Setting Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even or Odd Parity bit 1 Done None Stop bit ibit 2bits Initializing method By switch 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch For the NV1L RS2 For the NC1L RS2 Character configuration switches RUN SND RCV DVE Operation mode setting switch Front view Rear view Front view Rear view 1 Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch Switch position NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2 MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format
277. ing table shows the connectable models Series Series90 30 Model name IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 Clock Communication Type RS 232 RS 422 Connectable model GT 27 23 Refer to C37 11 2 1 Series90 70 697 0731 697 772 697 782 697 928 IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 697 0788 IC697CPU789 IC697CPM790 RS 232 RS 422 ONE OU 27 23 371122 VersaMax Micro IC200UAA003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 2000 028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 20000 005 IC200UDRO06 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 IC200UARO14 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDRO001 IC200UDR002 IC200UDR003 RS 232 RS 422 271 23 371123 11 2 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model List 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 1 Connecting to Series90 30 Connectable model Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected Communication driver i GE SNP X gt it PE gea Connection cable
278. ing terminating resistors a GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b YOKOGAWA PLC side When connecting a PLC link module to a GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the PC link module The following describes how to connect it on the PC link module F3LC11 2N Set the terminator switch TERMINATOR on the front panel of F3LC11 2N to the 4 WIRE side to enable the terminator LC02 0N Connect the terminating resistor provided with the LC02 ON across SDA and SDB and across RDA and RDB on the terminal block 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 7 7 2 Serial Connection lt gt lt o x 5 O Z E o z Z O o 7 2 5 side settings Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface Communication settings Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit 2 Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Sum Check Done Controller Setting CHI YOROCAW Oar 2 diaa Manufacturer YOKOGAWA CH4 None Controller Type YOKOGAWA STARDOM FASO0 FA M3 Retry Times k Dupl IBS as 3 Timeout Time Sec p Communication Delay Time ms Y
279. ing to Series90 30 0 00000 00 11 3 11 2 2 Connecting to 90 70 2 00 100000 kitten 11 6 11 2 3 Connecting to VersaMax 11 7 11 3 Connection 2 duse d d d dae 11 9 44 97 5 232 02 AERA AA sa 11 9 11 3 2 R9 422 68bl8 xit potet pet P cte teu Pee Ep eine ib 11 10 11 4 GOT Side Settirigs etm ee td ee te 11 12 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 11 12 11 4 2 Communication detail settings eene nenne 11 12 11 57 PEC Side Settirigi t ete e a tote 11 13 11 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 11 13 11 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro 11 13 11 5 3 Connecting 693 311 11 14 11 54 Connecting to 6 7 11 11 14 11 5 5 Station number 2 2 11 14 11 6 Device Range that Can Be 2 0 11 1 111 n 11 15 11 671 lt 5 90
280. into GOT gt RS 422 RS 422 connection 1200 _ Up to 1 m T diagram 1 GT temperature aoe 27 controller for 1 gt GT15 RS4 9S GOT gt O o 3j 27 Built into GOT 93 RS 485 connection 1200 _ diagram 1 GT 27 GT15 RS4 9S RS 485 8 GT FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 27 ser m i gt 5 485 connection 1200 FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m gt diagram 3 3 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m W BF 01 0500 0 5m 72 W BF 01 1000 1m 172 97 _ 01 152 1200 GT15 RS4 TE or RS 485 connection diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Touse the dedicated cable conversion of the cable may be necessary 3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers trey 61 81 i COM PORT1 e T SE SIL COM PORT1 COM PORT2 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Cable model Cable model Max bul Model Communication 5 eme i di 3 connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram istance Option device Model 4 name Type equipment
281. ion using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions NCAUTION Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the with a ground resistance of 100 or less When tightening the terminal screws use a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 N m to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product
282. ion Number communication of GOT Local Port Local of connection C tion T UDP TCP UDP Station s Port Number 10500 29910 6534 parameter aiu recommended Node IP Address Padd setting Extended Parameter Remote Station s ee MEMOBUS setting Address Protocol Extended MEMOBUS Node Port Remote t Port No MEMOBUS MELSEC Station s Port Number of GOT None MODBUS TCP Connection Type recommended UDP TCP Code BIN RTU BIN ACII Extended Up to 32 one byte MEMOBUS Node Name Arbitrary characters Protocol Extended MEMOBUS 16 two byte rotoco MEMOBUS MELSEC characters None 1 Set the same the Node IP Address Remote Station s IP MODBUS TCP Address and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number Code BIN RTU BIN ACII as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Node N R i Port Number on the GOT side Ph i N Remote GOT1000 Name of GOT For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Name Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following Subnet Mask ES 6 3 2 Ethernet setting Gateway IP Address System Port No Diagnostic 10000 Engineering Port No Local Por TCP Transmission PLC side Control Protocol Zero 3 setting Setting Window Timer Value TCP Retry Time 500ms TCP Close Time 60 sec IP Assemble Time 30 sec MAX Packet Length 1500 bytes 1 When MITSUBISHI PLC and YASKAWA PLC are used together in the same network do n
283. ion cable 1 Temperatur Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller bl del bl del Model Model Model Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model name distance name name distance number number Built into GT GOT 23 500m 77 RS232 pe 15m connection diagram 1 connection diagram 1 3j 27 GT15 RS2 9P PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 PXH9 Built into GOT User T A M 520 5 486 500m 10 2 RS 232 28 53 232 15m connection diagram 6 connection diagram 3 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO LTD For details of the product contact SYSMEXRA CO LTD 2 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details of the product contact OMRON Corporation 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT 5 5 X ui O 2 E z O X 5 2 m E gt 5 E z E 2 2 O When connecting to multiple temperature controllers RS 485 communication Communication driver Loo FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GO
284. ion cable 1 to the standard RS 485 communication interface 3 Connect the connection cable 1 to the high performance RS 485 communication interface 2 9 um o 2 2 O 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 8 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Communication driver oj YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT E i 3 Number of connectable hte Option device Model equipment name ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT UT320 27 GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT UT321 Built into GOT 23 UT350 GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m UT351 GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m UT420 GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m 1200 UT450 97 UT520 5 RS 485 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS4 9S UT550 4 wire type UT551 97750 RS 485 UP350 User RS 485 connection diagram 2 un FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m UP351 4 wire type 1200 FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 23 UP550 User A Up to the following RS 485 connection diagram 6 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m 3 UP750 2 wire type number of temperature UM330 controllers for 1 GOT UM331 92 55 485 connection diagram 4 QE GT16 GT15 31 0 350 4 wire type GT11 10 UM351 1200m GT15 RS4 TE US100 RS 485 connectio
285. ion diagram 4 GOT side RKC temperature controller side 2 RDA 2 T B RDB 7 J T A SDA 1 gt R B SDB 6 M R A RSA 56 RSB 8 Hh i CSA 4 CSB 9 k sc 5 lt i FG 1 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM m Connecting terminating resistors 12 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No 7 900 901 FB400 0500 0 ee 3 FB900 HA400 401 MA901 specifications HA900 901 SG 25 25 44 3 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 5 T B 27 27 46 4 4 R A 28 28 47 1 1 R B 29 29 48 2 2 3 following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector Modular connector pin No 9 31 9 3 Connection Diagram l E 2 O 2 3 a gt E o Y 2 Z E 2 2 O Precautions when preparing a cable 5 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be within the maximum distance 6 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 727 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 7 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting termi
286. ion resistor using the DIP switch SWA Dip switch SW4 ON on 109 1 OFF Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 Communication RS 422A OFF OFF specification setting RS485 ON ON Enable ON Termination resistor setting Disable 2 OFF 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 18 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Statio No 3 No 10 Station No 6 Station No 15 n Station No 1 Examples of 1 Direct specification The station number setting range of the temperature controller side differs from that of the GOT side Specify the station No of the temperature controller to be changed when setting devices referring the following ion number setting table Module address GOT side T emperature setting of station Remark controller temperature number controller side setting H PCP J H PCP A Oto 1016 The GOT sic saton H PCP B Hexadecimal Decimal number setting is the module Z TIO address setting value 1 Z COM The GOT sid ti 0toF dried ee Se RE On Z DIO Hexadecimal De
287. ion specification can be set for the following temperature controllers only Specification UT420 UT450 UT520 0 550 T551 UT 750 UP550 UP750 11099 051000 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller solde 100 6010 101 6011 102 6012 103 6013 104 6014 105 6015 106 6016 107 6017 For the setting other than the above 108 GD18 error dedicated device is out of 109 GD19 range will occur 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 8 32 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct
288. ion speed switch SW1 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following gt 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 545 pe 7 19200bps ES o 9 38400bps A 57600bps 115200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side shown 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 11 7 2 Serial Connection o 1 lt lt x gt 2 E o 2 2 o 2 Data format switch SW2 Set the character length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 7 2 5 Communication detail settings 7 2 10 Connecting PC link module 01 0 02 0 3 Module function switch SW3 Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Ch ter length aracter enga OFF 7bits 2 ON done OFF none Parity 3 ON even OFF odd ON 2bits 4 Stop bit SPI OFF 154 ON done 5 Check Possum OFF none End ch t 6 d 2 specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8 Security function OFF disabled Switch No Description Settings User setting 1to6 OFF inhibited 7 Modem OFF not compatibility compatible 8 Extern
289. ipment name module Tee Connection diagram number distance Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Differs JAMSC IF60 RS 232 or according to JAMSC IF61 ose PLC side mm 232 connection diagram 1 specifications 27 GT15 RS2 9P GL60S GL60H dE MEMOBUS GT GL70H 27 GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m Built into GOT 93 GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m same as JAMSC IF612 RS 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m ahove or 27 G8 88 422 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 4 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H or PROGIC 8 Communication driver Ceo YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS E Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT C Number of Model name ee mogel Max Option device Model Connection diagram number distance equipment module GT 27 Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Differs 920 RS 232 or according to J MP 930 HN PLC side A Ga RS 232 connection diagram 1 specifications 27 lt GT15 RS2 9P lt gt Built into GOT O E CP 9200 H GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m ae z PROGIC 8 RS 232 or h above connecting to
290. ission speed 9600bps fixed Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even Odd None Stop bit 1bit fixed Station 2 1 to 255 Communication protocol MODBUS 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps fixed Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit None fixed Stop bit bit fixed 5 14 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 5 3 Connecting to 9 5 5 4 Connecting to interface converter RC 77 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key Communication settings of the temperature controller Make the communication settings using setting 1 RS 485 communication settings switches Item Set value Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 8bits fixed MANUAL AUTO AUTO Parity bit Even Odd None DCE DTE switching DCE Stop bit Abit fixed RS 422 485 switching RS 485 Station No 2 1 to 255 Terminating resistor OFF selection 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other 1 Adjust with GOT and temperature controller settings
291. istance Option device Model name ation Type resistor equipment number number GT W BF 02 27 Up to 16 Z COMs 0500 0 5 Built into GOT 93 for 1 GOT W BF 02 1000 1m RS 422 Z TIO Up to 16 1200 Z CT Up to 16 1 M RS 422 W BW 02 W BF 02 3000 3m connection diagram Z DIO Up to 16 or 1 27 Total of Z TIO Z RS 422 GT15 RS4 9S CT and Z DIO Up connection diagram 2 to 31 for Z COM GT Ponce 1200m 2 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT 23 W BF 02 1 Up to 16 Z COMs 0500 0 5m for 1 GOT W BF 02 1000 1m RS 485 FA LTBGT2RACBLO5 0 5m 4 4 1200 CT Up to RS 485 W BW 01 W BF 02 3000 3m connection diagram 5 23 Z DIO Up to 16 uu 3 FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m Total of Z TIO Z RS 485 CT and Z DIO Up connection diagram 9 GT to 31 for Z COM RS 485 27 1200m connection diagram 2 GT15 RS4 TE 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 11 9 2 System Configuration l E 2 O 2 3 a E o Y 2
292. istor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of 4 uj zi J O E z O 5 2 E gt 5 O 2 E 2 2 O 2 FUJI temperature controller side When connecting a FUJI temperature controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 97 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 11 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 4 Side Settings 5 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment controller Setting Manufacturer Fux None Controler Type FUJI PXR PXG PXH fj Routing Informatio 5 8 Gateway Standard F RS422 485 Communication 2 Eh Gateway Serve 20er FUJI PXR PXG PXH BE Gateway Clent 5 FTP Server Fg Transfer F Property Sh 0 Redundant Transmission Speed BPS ition No Switch stati Switd Parity Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Host Address Delay Time ms Format ok 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer Controller PXR PXG PXH I F Interface to be used Driver
293. it Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Odd Parity Odd fixed Specify the adapter address station No of the adapter to which the GOT is connected in the connected 1 to 31 network Default 1 Adapter Address 12 Specify the host address station No of the PLC that the GOT will monitor in the connected network Default 2 Host Address 1 to 31 1 Set the address without overlapping the address of other units 2 GOT automatically sets the values of Transmission Speed Adapter Address and Host Address to the HMI Adapter 2 SIEMENS 57 200 14 2 5 PLC Side Setting Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even SIEMENS PLC Adapter Address 0 For details of SIEMENS PLCs refer to the following Host Address 2 manuals gt SIEMENS PLC user s Manual Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Model name Refer to Tiansmissi n speed used for 19200bps PLC CPU 57 200 1427 Speed communication with the connected 38400bps p equipment 57600bps HMI Adapter 6ES7 972 0 11 0 0 14 2 6 Default 19200bps 115200bps PC PPI cable 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 1427 Set this item when change the data 6ES7 901 3 30 0 0 7
294. it is performed during Even Select Common Controller Setting from the y COmmihication a menu Default No 21 Set the number of retries to be performed when 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Retry communication error occurs 0 to 5times channel to be used from the list menu Default Otime Set the time period for a communication to time 3 Timeout Set the following items Time out 3 to 30sec e Manufacturer RKC Default 3sec Controller Type RKC SR Mini HG Set this item to adjust the transmission timing Delay Time of the communication request from the GOT 0 to 300ms I F Interface to be used Default Oms Driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Select the communication format 5 Default 1 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Format 1 Controller Type Accessible to H PCP J I F and Driver set SRZ FB PF HA MA RMC SRX B400 series Make the settings according to the usage Format 2 Accessible to CB series RB AG THV SA SB1 environment series 7 gt 9 4 2Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 communication setting 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 39 9 4 GOT Side Settings 1 Communi
295. itch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side When connecting a YOKOGAWA temperature controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected K7 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 26 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 4 GOT Side Settings 8 4 1 Setting communication 8 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicau ing settings Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Set the channel of the connected equipment peed BPS 2 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit h orano a Parity Even Manufacturer vokoGAWA Sum Check None YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced eset a 3 Retry Times 0 8 8 Gateway WF x S omen bu ICE ES Timeout Time Sec 3 EE eet Host Address 1 FTP Server denim ramen er Delay Time ms 5 tation No Switct Data Bit FE 4 Format 1 Parity Sum Check Retry Times EE Description Range Delay Time ms 4800b Set this item when change the T M transmission speed used for ps Transmission communication with the connected 19200b5ps Speed 38400bps 9600bps 37609058 Tamam z 115200bps s Set this item when
296. ith the RS 485 communication 5 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in Win ICH the E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication _ With 4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal gt m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Terminating resistor 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 19 RS 485 connection diagram 19 E Temperature Temperature GOT side 4 controller 2 4 zt controller SDA1 TXD1 6 EAD RSB 5 3 r3 n SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 RSA RTS 14 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W RSB RTS 16 4 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 T NC 3 4 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15
297. k No station No notification The network No and station No of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup If connected by other than Ethernet 0 is stored Device Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No 1 to 239 GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No 1 to 64 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 29 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 30 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring CONNECTIONS TO NON MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS dee me qe 10 11 12 13 14 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES 2 1 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 CONNECTION 4 1 CONNECTION TO TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER e ees eB es ete ee T 5 1 CONNECTION YASKAWA 6 1 CONNECTION 7 1 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 CONNECTION TO 11 1 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 9 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 HITACHI IES PLC Connecta
298. l gt Communication format RS 232 e Sum check Done Protocol transmission control procedure 1 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side 2 transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 79 2 4 2 Communication detail settings 3 The setting range varies with the connected PLC Connecting to the intelligent serial port module 1 For transmission control procedure1 Item Set value Transmission speed 19200bps Station No 0 Data bit Tbit Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Control Method None For RS 232 communication RS 232 MODE switch 2 For RS 422 communication RS 422 MODE switch 2 Communication format Sum check Done 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 11 2 5 PLC Side Setting 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item r
299. lectric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 8 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200 MP2300 23005 Connection cable Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Model name MP2200 MP2300 MP2300S PLC Connection cable GOT 5 Number of Communication eA Cable model th connectable 3 5 n ion n module ae Connection diagram number Di evee 9 equipment Built into GOT GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m i 2171F 01 3m Differs 218 01 RS 232 according to 2181 02 3 5 232 connection side diagram 1 specifications 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 communicatio GT 27 module Built into GOT 93 i m 217IF 01 RS 422 GRS 422 connection same as diagram 4 above GT 27 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection a lt 5 2 gt O E z E 2 2 O 6 2 7 Connection Diagram d RS 232 connection diagram 4 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side The following diagram shows the connection between the
300. length of the communication driver Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct For the settings refer to the following gt Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 4 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 2 Setting Controller The types for the selection differ depending on the PLC to be used For the settings refer to the following Type Model name Type Model name PXG4 302 PXG5 c H 702 FUJI PXR PXG PXH PXG9 1002 gt 9 5 H 2002 PROGIC 8 H 4010 GL120 300 L GL130 H 700 YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 o GL60S 2000 GL60H 200 GL70H 250 920 252 c MP930 H 252B YASKAWA CP 9200SH MP 900 Series gt 940 e H 252C 92005 E HITACHI HIDIC H Series H 20DR YASKAWA CP 9200 H CP 9200 H s H 28DR lt YASKAWA CP 9300MS compatible CP 9300MS 4006 ul MP2200 ow H 64DR MP2300 H 20
301. ller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type Set either of the following 57 300 400 57 200 I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the following When connecting to SIEMENS 7 300 400 SIEMENS 57 300 400 When connecting to SIEMENS 57 200 SIEMENS 57 200 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 227 14 2 4 detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 5 1 1 2 I F communication setting 14 6 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 Serial Connection Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 SIEMENS 57 300 400 Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 38400 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Adapter Address 1 Host Address 2 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 1 f transmission speed used for 9600bps ransmission 12 communication with the connected 19200bps Speed equipment 38400bps Default 38400bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 8bit fixed the connected equipment Default 8b
302. llowing manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 When powering ON the system Turn ON all PLC CPUs before turning ON the GOT If the GOT is turned ON before power up of the PLC CPUs restart the GOT 2 When powering OFF a PLC CPU at another station When a PLC CPU at another station the PLC CPU to which the HMI Adapter is not connected is turned OFF monitoring by the GOT is stopped To resume the monitoring restart the GOT Monitoring will not be resumed on GOT even if the PLC CPU is turned ON again 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 3 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE Connection cable Communication driver Loom Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway Connection cable GOT Maximum Number of connectable Ethernet 2 2 Series Cable 1 segment Option device Model equipment Module 2 length CP343 1 IT 100BASE TX When PLC GOT is N 1 SIMATIC CP343 1 Shielded twisted pair cable STP or 16 PLCs or less for 1 GOT 57 300 CP343 1 Lean unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of CP343 1 Advanced category higher When PLC GOT is 1 N TOBASE T 100m Built into GOT The following shows the SIMATIC CP443 1 IT Shielded twisted pair cable STP or number of GOTs for 1 PLC S7 400 CP443 1 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of 32 or less recommende
303. llowing parameters Item Setting details Module Position Value in Position of the Ethernet module IP Address PLC side IP address Module Address Subnet PLC side subnet mask mask Number of connections to Set 1 as the number of connected GOT configure for this module This is a Server connection Servers respond to connection Mark the check box request from remote clients Local Properties Select Accept all connection requests Server 1 Remote Properties Set 10 00 in TSAP Client in TSAR Enable the Keep Alive function for this Unmark the check box connection 14 3 5 Precautions b 57 300 400 Set the following parameters When using the Ethernet module Item Setting details IP Address PLC side IP address Properties Sub ud PLC side subnet mask mask When using the built in Ethernet port Item Setting details Device name Set PN IO IP Address PLC side IP address Properties dd PLC side subnet mask mask c 57 1200 Set the following parameters Item Setting details IP Address PLC side IP address Ethernet addresses Subnet PLC side subnet mask mask When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT gt 14 3 3 Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when u
304. lt Oms Specify whether to use the station No during communication Station No 3 If Yes is selected the station No is Yes or No Selection fixed to 0 Default Yes 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 4 GOT Side Settings o 2 lt 2 E 2 2 O 2 HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit Stop Bit Parity Retry Times 7 bit 1 bit Even Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Station No Selection Item Description Range Set this it h th en change the 4800bps nd transmission speed used for Transmission communication with the connected pina Speed equipment 19200bps J 384006 Default 19200bps m Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with Tbit fixed the connected equipment Default 7bit Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a Parity parity check and now it is performed Even fixed during communication Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms
305. m or 9 FG less t 6 GOT side connector z For the GOT side connector refer to the following RS232 connection diagram 2 gt 1 4 4 connector specifications a GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side c ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side connector lel seg Use the connector compatible with the ALLEN a BRADLEY PLC side module RD RXD 2 2 TXD For details refer to the ALLEN BRADLEY PLC E SD TXD 3 3 RXD user s manual i 2 ER DTR 4 6 DSR gt SG 5 sG DR DSR 6 20 DTR RS RTS 7 J i 4 RTS CS CTS 8 s cts 9 8 CD RS232 connection diagram 3 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side CD 1 1 24V RD RXD 2 k 7 TXD SD TXD 3 4 RXD ER DTR 4 5 2224 DR DSR 6 SG RS RTS 7 6 CTS CS CTS s Ts e bs FG 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 7 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 5 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacturer Controller Type 5 500 Network Duplex Settir amp Routing Informatio amp Bk Gateway yr Standard 1 F RS232 p Communication El Gateway Serve 88 Gateway Client E FTP Server File Transfer F Property Value 15 0 Redundant
306. miis Default 8bits 14 2 6 Connecting to HMI Adapter Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Communication settings Specify whether or not to performa The following communication settings are made at the parity check and how it is performed E communication detail settings of the GOT side For details refer to the following during communication dd gt 14 24 MCommunication detail settings Default Even Specify the adapter address station No of the adapter to which the GOT Adapter Address connected in the connected 0 to 31 network Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Default 0 Data bit 8bits fixed Specify the host address station No Parity bit Odd fixed of the PLC that the GOT will monitor in the connected network Default 2 Adapter address 1 to 31 Host address 1 to 31 Setting item PLC side setting Host Address 1 to 31 Stop bit 1bit fixed 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective zi T
307. module 1 to 239 Options Select Fetch passive Default blank Local PLC side IP address Set the station No of the connected IP dec Remote GOT side IP address Station Ethernet module 1 to 254 Addresses FA Cc Default blank PORT dud 57 200 OP Remote GOT side port No Type Set the PLC type to be connected 57 300 400 87 1200 c Write port setting Set the IP address of the connected i Item Setting details IP Address Ethernet module PLC B Default blank address Options Mode Select Write passive zl i i Local PLC side IP address Port No 102 fixed 102 fixed IP dec o Setthe Connection No Rack No set Remote GOT side IP address Z Connection Addresses No Rack 1 on PLC side 0 7 Local PLC side port No Default 0 2 Remote GOT side port No Set the Module Position Slot No set o Module on the PLC side Position Slot Default OP 0 to 6 d Precautions for setting efau 4 57 300 400 The Keep Alive function of the Siemens CP Module No 57 200 OP 0 2 7 300 400 OP 2 OP 0 to 31 is not supported Specify 0 for Keep Alive Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed 5 1 Connection No Rack and Module Position Slot are unnecessary for S7 1200 OP 2 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 13 14 3 Ethernet Connection 2 Ethernet connection type OP communication 57 200 Set the fo
308. mperature controller UTAdvanced Series Signal mann GREEN Series GREEN Series UT35A UT55A un dition BY UT UP UM Us UT32A UP35A UM33A product condition ee pa E UP55A product condition A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 SG 27 25 303 409 503 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication DW port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in RIGAS the E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication With port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor having 100 1 2W should be provided for a temperature co
309. n diagram 8 2 wire type s FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m 3 ser i i RS 485 connection diagram 7 1200 FA LTBGT2RACBL10 1m 3 2 wire type 3 ij FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m iine RS 485 UT750 2 GT 27 552 85 485 connection diagram 10 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type 1 Connect the connection cable to the standard RS 485 communication interface 2 Connect the connection cable to the high performance RS 485 communication interface 3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 8 4 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 2 Connecting to UT100 Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced ane Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature RS232C RS485 Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model Commun Cable model connectable d Max Model dedi E Max equipment Series Connection diagram ication Connection diagram Option device Model distance name distance number Type number Built into GOT 485 31 temperature User E UT100 connection diagram 1200m ML2 RS 232
310. n of the outer sheath Washer Gasket Insulating material 3 Cut the external conductor insulting material and internal Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below z Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same L dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp B Clamp and external conductor Cable in use 3C 2V 6 mm 3 mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 7 mm 5 mm Solder here 4 Solder the contact to the internal conductor 5 Insert the connector assembly shown in 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed 1 20 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type refer to the following RS 422 485 communication unit 27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor s
311. n settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 communication setting Stop Bit 4 2 4 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 HITACHI HIDIC H Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 7 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Retry Times 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Station No Selection Yes Item Description Range Set this it h h th e change the 4800bps transmission speed used for Transmission 9600bps communication with the connected Speed equipment 19200bps 38400b Default 19200bps ps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with Tbit fixed the connected equipment Default 7bit Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a Parity parity check and how it is performed Even fixed during communication Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms GOT Defau
312. nating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 32 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 3 3 RS 485 cable 3 RS 485 connection diagram 3 GOT side RKC temperature controller side Connection diagram terminal block Modular connector 2 Tu SDA1 TXD1 6 L g 2 TRB 1 RS 485 connection diagram 1 8 SDB1 TXD1 8 gt 1 T R A RKC temperature controller side 1 ad GOT side Modular connector 2 NC 1 4 NC 1 ae n AP AES 1 SDA 1 e 1 TRA SG 2 3 SG o 1 1 SDB 3 2 TIR B NC 3 amp 1 1 1 RDA 2 i a SG NC i i el SG S 1 1 1 1 1 i 7 4 NC SDA2 TXD2 5 1 1 1 SG 5 5 NC SDB2 TXD2 7 4 i 1 1 Rsa H RDAXRXD29 9 1 1 1 RSB 8 RDA1 RXD1 10 2 1 1 1 i csa 4 RDB2 RXD2 2 1 1 1 csp 9 RDB1 RXD1 12 Wee M 4 1 E KS
313. nd set it as 00 to 09 6 Setto 0 only when connecting to Port2 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 13 11 5 PLC Side Setting 11 5 3 Connecting to C693CMM311 11 5 5 Station number setting Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setting item PLC side setting SNP Enable YES SNP Mode Slave Interface RS232 RS485 Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Parity ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Flow Control NONE Turn Around Delay NONE Timeout Long Set to YES 2 Set to SLAVE 3 Setthe communication format to be used only when connecting to Port2 4 Setto NONE 5 Set to NONE 6 Set to LONG 11 5 4 Connecting to 697 711 Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setting item PLC side setting SNP Enable YES SNP Mode Slave Interface 3 RS232 RS485 Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Parity ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Flow Control NONE Turn Around Delay NONE Timeout Long 1 Setto YES 2 Set to SLAVE 3 Set the communication format to be used only when connecting to Port2 4 Setto NONE 5 Set to NONE
314. nfiguration Unit address OtoF Setting range 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the module address without overlapping with that of other units 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol l E 2 O Z 2 a gt E o Y 2 Z E 2 2 O LLU LULL Dip switch amp VL Em 1 O a p M 62 Her jj _ S OFF Ll amp amp ha E nnnnnann Front side Right side Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 9600bps ON OFF Communication 19200bps OFF ON speed 38400bps ON ON bit 8bits OFF ON Parity None Data bit 8bits ON ON configuration Parity Even Data bit 8bits Parity Odd MODBUS ON protocol 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 43 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Module address setting switch 00 Settin
315. ng X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 4 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No Signal name 2 110 CB100 CB400 8700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 TIR A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 B400 name PF901 HA900 901 MA900 MA901 RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 TIR A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 NC SG NC NC SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDA1 RXD1 RDB2 RXD2 RDB1 RXD1 N RSA RTS N RSB RTS N CSA CTS NC CSB CTS O O O 1 2 3 4 on Oc A WHY 20 6 RS 485 connection diagram 6 Temperature Temperature controller controller T R B TIR A SG Temperature Temperature controlle
316. nication detail settings 1 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Click the OK button when settings are completed Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms GOT Default 5ms POINT TEN Select the communication format Default 1 The settings of connecting equipment can be Format 1 confirmed in I F Communication Setting Format Accessible to PXR PXG PXH 1 2 For details refer to the following Format 2 1 1 2 I F communication settin 1 UU 9 Not accessible to PXH 5 12 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 4 GOT Side Settings 1 2 3 4 Host address Do not specify a number between 200 and 215 Format When connecting to PXH specify the format 1 When connecting to only PXR PXG specifying the format 2 is recommended Delay Time Set the delay time to 5ms or more Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 5 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 4 GOT Side Settings 5 13 X ui O 2 E z O X 5 2 m E gt 5 O
317. nication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 5 20 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 7 Precautions CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable 6 2 6 2 6 3 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 17 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 6 28 2 lt 5 lt gt E z E o 2 2 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Model name Clock Communication Connectable model Refer to GL120 RS 232 o HE GL130 RS 422 27 23 GL60S RS 232 GT ae RS 422 3 622 GL70H MP920 MP930 RS 232 CP 9300MS x 72 623 CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 RS 232 er cT MP940 RS 422 737624 CP 9200SH GT papa CP 317 27 23 2200 5 232 2300 R42 727626 MP2300S MP920 MP2200 MP2300 MP2300S x Ethernet 97 376341 CP 9200SH CP 312 CP 317 6 2 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model List 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 or GL
318. nnection cable To use transmission control procedure 2 as a protocol select HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 as a communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Intelligent 9 Commun Cable model Max connectable serial port icati i i i R 4 ication Connection diagram number distance option device Mogel equipment module Type Model name 302 2 H 702 2 1002 2 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m H 2002 RS 232 or 15m H 300 65 232 connection diagram 1 H 700 GT15 RS2 9P H 2000 Built into GOT lt O z E 2 2 O Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or ss RS 232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m RS 232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed H 4010 E RS 232 38400bps 15m GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m RS 232 connection m diagram 2 27 Transmission speed other than GT15 RS2 9P the above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m orse RS 232 connection diagram 2 Built into GOT 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 3 2 2 System Configuration Model name H 302 H 702 H 1002 H 2002 H 4010 H 300 H 700 H 2000 PLC Intelligent serial port module COMM H COMM 2H 4 2 3 Connecti
319. ntroller Side Setting 8 31 a 2 E 2 2 3 gt E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 8 5 6 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 7 No 1 No 15 No 6 GOT J 0 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable lt gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings In the read out operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable For details of host address setting refer to the following gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings The all stat
320. ntroller which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Z NOME 37 m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 2 O 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 19 12 RS 485 connection diagram 12 RS232C RS485 interface converter MEHR Temperature controller _ Temperature controller RDA La L 6 TX RDB 4 4 TX SDB 2 E RX SDA 1 5 RX SG 5 2 SG T GND Wi rerum Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4w gt 711 Terminating resistor should be provided for temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 on the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 13 RS 485 connection diagram 13 GOT side Temperature controller i Temperature controller SDA 1 f Hs RX SDB 6 5 T 5 RX tt Fog ti Tf r1 RDB 7 1 1 6 E B 6 TX se s H H e 5 HHH 2 se RSA 3 gloeien j ud o 2 RSB Terminating resistor css o k FG 1 Terminating resistor having 100
321. ntroller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 4 RS 485 connection diagram 4 GOT side Temperature controller ij Temperature controller iw ee C 4 RDA1 f H SDB RDB1 4 7 1 SDA SDA1 1 T RDB SDB1 2 RDA SG 9 rt SG SDA2 5 lt 2 6 ad RDA2 7 RDB Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4 2 FG 10 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Signal name nadia id UIS UT55A product condition B UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A UREA UP55A product condition A SDB 23 21 301 407 501 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 SG 27 25 303 409 503 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model ues Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Pr
322. o B255 255 S REAL REALO 0 to REAL999 999 Timer Set 4 3 T3 0 1 PRE to T255 255 1 PRE 4 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed value T lt Timer Current 483 T3 0 2 ACC to 255 255 2 value T gt Counter Set 453 C3 0 1 PRE to C255 255 1 PRE 2 value C Decimal Counter Current value C3 0 2 ACC to C255 255 2 ACC z c Integer N N3 0 to N255 255 32bit integer L3 0 to L3 255 1 2 L255 0 to L255 255 1 Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit data 2 Writing to device is not allowed for 16 bit data 3 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 17 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 18 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model 1 11 2 11 2 System 11 3 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 9 11 4 GOT Side 5 11 12 11 5 PLC Side 5 11 13 11 6 Device Range that Can Be 11 15 11 7 Preca tionis fees eee E Rowers 11 15 11 1 zi o O z 9 E 2 2 O 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model List The follow
323. oduct with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor UT55A Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E3 terminal area option Detailed code model With CH3 UP55A Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 5 With 4 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 J 2 E 2 2 3 E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 15 8 3 Connection Diagram 5 RS 485 connection diagram 5
324. of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual 7 22 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Setting item Bit CH1 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA500 FA M3 Device Information X 00201 Kind 2 8 2 65 Deve 00201 71664 e Network Host Other NetworkNo 1 Station 1 4 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Device word device Fil 8 Set the file No No information Displays type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Select this for monitoring other controllers Network 5 After selecting set the station number of the Other controller to be monitored NW Set the network No Station No Set the station No 7 4 4 FA500 FA M3 Series Device No Device name Setting range representa tion Input relay X X00201 to X71664 Output relay Y Y00201 to Y71664 Internal relay 1 11 to 165536 Link relay L L1 to L71024 5 Common relay E E1 to E4096 E Special relay M M1 to M9984 Decimal amp Timer TU T
325. of connectable Series un Option device Model equipment ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT 27 Built into GOT GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m SLC500 RS 232 15 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver ITI SLC500 AB 1 For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 DH485 network Connection cable ps Adapter PLC Connection cable GOT cH Ei Number of Series A A communicate et He ram Max Option device Model 9 distance equipment number Built into GOT SLC500 1770 KF3 RS 232 2 RS232 connection 15m 1 GOT for 1 adapter diagram 2 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 10 4 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series When connecting to one PLC Connection cable Communication driver m AB MicroLogix PLC Connection cable GOT CE E Number of connectable Series SU euo 29 5 Option device Model equipment Type Connection diagram number distance GT MicroLogix1000 21 ps pu d RS 232 Built into GOT En 1761 027 Series or later or 15m 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT MicroLogix1000 eae a RS232 connection diagram 3 27 1
326. of lowerfser 3 5 8 Gateway Standard 1 F Ethemet Muti p Communication Gateway Serve 22 Gateway Clent E Mai GOT Ethernet Setting FTP Server Fie Transfer F Property Value 1 Q Redundant GOT Net No 1 A Station No Switch Een i GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 4 GOT Communication Port No 5016 Retry Times Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Ethemet YASKAWA Gateway Ethemet Setting dh OS Host NetNo Station Unit Type IP Address m 1 1 YASKAWA 1 1 1 1 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer YASKAWA Controller YASKAWA 2000 900 92005 I F Interface to be used Driver Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment L gt 6 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 737 14 2 communication setting 6 18 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection
327. oller sel communication protocol MODBUS For detai catalog x RS 232 RS 485 7 Catalog of RKC temperature controllers 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List 3792 1 ect the detailed model name which supports each communication type and s of RKC temperature controller detailed model names refer to the following 9 3 l E 2 O 2 3 a E o Y D Z E 2 2 O 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 1 Connecting to H PCP J When connecting to one temperature controller Connection cable COM PORT3 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration Communication driver Cem RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Conversion Temperature controller Connection cable 1 connector a connectable Model Communication Cable model Mes Model Option device Model equipment name Type Connection diagram number distance name W BF 28 0500 0 5m Built into GOT W BF 28 1000 1m W BF 28 3000 3m 7 l 15m d GT X User 27 RS 232 connection E GT15 RS2 9P 2 diagram 1 RS 232 GT 27 x Built into GOT 93 E W BF 02 0500 0 5m g 02 1000 1 1 15m FAX067 A 3 GT W BF 02 3000 3m 27 t GT15 RS2 9P H o x a O T Built
328. ommunication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT o 1 lt lt x gt 2 E 2 2 o 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 21 7 3 Ethernet Connection The device ranges of controller that be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored 1 When using YOKOGAWA PLC FA M3 When YOKOGAWA PLC is used the device range that can be used differs depending on the PLC model selected by the GT Designers Since YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 has larger device points that can be set than YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 select YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 if a large device points should be set 2 Devices to be set for an object When a device outside the range is set for an object an indefinite value is displayed on the object No error is displayed in the system alarm A device to be set for an object must be in the device range of YOKOGAWA PLC For details on the device range
329. on No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register 1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register Station No GOT data register GD Setting range 100 GD10 101 GD11 1 to 99 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error occurs 115 GD25 Device settings of RKC temperature controller Network 20 Set by a value of unit address 1 For unit address 0 Set 1 For unit address F Set 16 9 52 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 9 6 1 RKC SR Mini HG Device No Device name Setting range representation Q 8 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices ih 9 5 S Data 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal 9 7 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 01 station GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be
330. on cable GOT Number of proline Cable model Max Opened Model connectable EA Connection diagram number distance ponds dis equipment Built into GOT GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m RS 232 or 15m 6 9 232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 intelligent serial port module GT09 C30R40401 7T 3m Built into GOT GT09 C100R40401 7T 10m GT09 C200R40401 7T 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40401 7T 30m 200m or RS 422 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS4 9S Product manufactured by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd For details of this product contact HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module Can be specified with the CPU software of revision J or later 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 2 Connecting to 200 to 252 series series board type 150 series Communication driver Loz HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 Connection cable o To use transmission control procedure 2 as a protocol select HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 as a communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Commun Canis model Number of connectable 9 ication cae ey Option device Model equipment LE Connection diagram number distance Type I O GT 27 PAN CRIME Built into GOT pn z 252 1 H 252B H 20DR H 28DR GT09 C
331. on diagram 1 diagram 1 GT 27 c GT15 RS2 9P 2 5 Built into GOT 23 PXR3 Up to 31 PXR4 RS 485 500m 1 30 2 232 RS 232 connection 45m temperature 5 connection diagram 2 diagram 2 GT controllers PXR9 27 for 1 GOT RS2 GT15 RS2 9P 2 GT 27 Built into GOT 93 gt 2 User RS 485 500m Ks485 RS 232 98 232 connection 45m connection diagram 3 diagram 2 GT o 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO LTD For details of the product contact SYSMEXRA CO LTD 52 Product manufactured by LINEEYE CO LTD For details of the product contact LINEEYE CO LTD 3 Product manufactured by System Sacom corp For details of the product contact System Sacom corp 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 5 2 System Configuration When connecting via RS 485 communication Communication driver PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communic Cable model Max Model connectable name ation Type Connection diagram number distance equipment GT FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 2 27 GE8 RS 485 connection diagram 4 500m FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 2 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m PXR3 97 Up to 31 PXR4 temperature ates RS 485 Gs RS
332. on diagram number distance L equipment module Type Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m F120S or 1 GOT for 1 general F140S FFU120B RS 232 15 purpose interface F150S aRS 232 connection diagram gr module 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Communication driver i FUJI MICREX F e Connection cable T link PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 pude Model Cable model Max UNIONE YER connectable name 4 Connection diagram number distance equipment capsule Type Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m es or 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C F140S FFK120A C10 RS 232 mE 15m doe e 232 connection diagram GT 485 interface capsule F150S 27 1 GT15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 8 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs using RS 232C 485 interface capsules Communication driver MICREX F T link T link
333. on setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 23 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 6 3 3 Ethernet setting GOT Ethernet Setting This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings GOT IP Address 192 168 Subnet Mask 255 255 Default Gateway 0 0 Peripheral S W Communication Port No 5015 Transparent Port No 5014 eS Gees 1B Controller Setting Ethernet setting Item Description Range GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the Default aa ee Gateway 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Peripheral S W 5014 to 65534 9 Set the GOT port No for the S W Communication communication Default 5015 Except for 5011 Port No 5012 5013 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Transparent Port tr
334. onfiguration Ethernet and Connection Test to display PING Test GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 Timeout Period PING Tes 5 B 53 Test Result 1 Specify the GOT IP Address of the PING Test and click the PING Test button 2 2 The Test Result is displayed after the PING 4 Test is finished PING Test Connection Close 3 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of Communication Settings P address of GOT specified by Ping command 1 26 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Confirming the communication state on the GOT PING Test can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility IP address of the other terminal 192 168 L 3 1139 Ping transmission o z 2 gt o x 2 a 2 te 5 lt a 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 27 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function The station monitoring function detects the fa
335. onnection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 4 number of increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance 14 10 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 3 3 GOT Side Settings Communication detail settings 5222 Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface Communication settings Property Value Set the channel of the connected equipment GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 2 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5023 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Manufacturer SIEMENS Controller Type SIEMENS S7 Ethemet Timeout Time Sec 3 SCIONS ESE Please set jernet Setting of the Controller with a of lower io ee 3 Delay Time ms 0 Prat Ethernet SIEMENS 57 Gateway Gateway etai Setting GOT Ethernet Setting Item Description Range s i Set the network No of the GOT GOT Net No 1 to 239 a 5 29 BOTE Set the station No of the GOT 15254 Deby Tme ms 0 Default 1 Set the
336. op bit Device address 1 to 994 Slave address Device address 2 4 Slave address Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 11 Connecting to RMC500 Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 13 Connecting to THV A1 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps
337. or details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Communication and port settings Make the communication and port settings with a peripheral tool 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection Device name Set value Address 11031 Protocol MEMOBUS Mode RTU Transmission 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps speed 273 57600bps Data bit 8bits Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Error check CRC16 1 2 3 Set the address according to the Host Address setting on the GOT side For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 6 2 8 Communication detail settings Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown Also the setting range differs depending on the YASKAWA PLC model The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 6 2 8 Communication detail settings Sequence program To communicate the YASKAWA PLCs with the GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required The following shows an example ladder program for M
338. ost Address 0 Time ms 0 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 38400bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a e None parity check and how it is performed Parity MM Even during communication Odd Default None Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Btimes error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No of the PLC to which the GOT is Host Address connected in the network of the 0 to 31 GOT Default 0 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms GOT Default Oms 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 23 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When
339. ost link service B o Tcpyp Selectthe protocol to be used The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with protocol the port of the host link the above numbers Port No 12291 service via Ethernet Consult with the administrator of the network before Host link service B setting an IP address to the GOT and controller protocol comman Select the command data type O ASCII format to be used in the port of the 2 data type host link service via Ethernet Port No 12291 When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT 7 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using Disables the write command to 0 Not protected 1 Protected this module with the host link service via Ethernet Write protection 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 7 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 For the port No of the set the port No of the host link service to be used C 7 3 2 m Ethernet setting multiple GOTs 3 Set this as necessary A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the c
340. ot set the same value for the Station of MITSUBISHI PLC and the CNO Connection number of YASKAWA PLC 2 Setthe same the Node IP Address Remote Station s IP Address and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following 9 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 6 20 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Sequence program To communicate the MP2000 series or MP920 series with the GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive massages is required When connecting the MP2000 series or MP920 series with multiple GOTs ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages r IF A Sets parameters in the first scan after startup NL 1 SB000001 true Low speed scan DWGL SB000003 High speed scan DWGH SB000001 FOR A Wu Variable Clears DW register to zero Init 00000 Max 00031 Step 00001 STORE 0002 Source 00000 Dest DW00000i END FOR END FOR 0003 NL 2 4 lt STORE Sets the connection number 0004 Source 00001 2 Dest 0 00002 77 lt STORE Sets the coil offset 2 LE 005 Source 00000 NL 2 2 Dest 0 00008 m 2
341. out Confirm communication pathway or modules when the GOT restarts 14 4 Device Range that The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item 57 300 400 series and S7 Ethernet gt 1 Bit CH1 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Device Information Kind D EJF BIT Range 4 56 Device 0000 5117 Network Host Other Station No 1 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are Information selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Select this item to monitor the controller specified Host Lid as the host station in the GOT utility setup Select this item to monitor a controller other than the one specified as the host station Network SIEMENS S7 300 400 Set the MPI address of the controller monitore
342. play Name Gea 1 28 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 2 Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set 0 Normal 1 Abnormal The bit is reset after the fault is recovered a For the Ethernet connection except for the Ethernet multiple connection Ethernet Setting Qo Z si B YX Host Net No Station Unit Type IP Address Port No Communication O GS231 bit0 a 1 2 71 71 071 71 192 168 3 39 5001 UDP GS231 bit 1 1 3 QJ71E71 L71E71 192 168 3 40 5001 UDP z 65231 bit2 1 4 710 71 192 168 3 41 5001 UDP 652913 1 5 71 71 192 168 3 42 5006 UDP ra o Qc 2 Ethernet setting No a Device b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 65231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 n GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 gt 69234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 5235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 E GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 69237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 lt 65238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 b For the Ethernet multiple connection or the temperat
343. product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Communication driver MICREX F Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Model bl del Max f 966 interface ication ee d m Option device Model equipment name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type Built into GOT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m F55 FFK120A C10 RS 232 or 15m cor GT 485 interface capsule 5 232 connection diagram 1 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 4 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs Connection cable Communication driver FUJI MICREX F PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Model d 988 interface ication d on Bod Option device Model equipment name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type GT 27 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500m Built into GOT 93 GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m RS 232C 48
344. ps OFF ON other units on speed 53 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character 38400bps ON ON stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT Data bit 8bit side to the receiving status until the temperature controller Parity N OFF OFF becomes ready to send Set as necessary NONE 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not Data bit Data bit 8bit made 7 ee ON OFF configuration Parity Even Data bit 8bit 9 5 15 Connecting to X TIO Module Parity Odd EN OUR peines MODBUS ON 1 Communication settings E Make the communication settings of the temperature Internal data OFE controller pus termination Item Setting range resistor ON ON setting Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data interval Communication protocol MODBUS extension 0 to 99ms ON ON Data bit 8bit Parity None time Data bit 8bit Parity Even Data bit configuration Data bit 8bit Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Module address 2 1 to 99 When combining the module turn ON the internal data bus terminating resistor at both ends of the module Internal data bus terminating resistor Data interval extension 0 to 99ms time 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 48 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Module address settings
345. ption device Model equipment name Connection diagram number distance Type GT 27 Built into GOT 93 GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m Differs RS 232 or according to 952 RS 232 tion di 4 2 5 232 connection diagram 4 specifications 27 GT15 RS2 9P MP 940 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT 27 GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m Built into GOT 93 lt GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m GT09 C200R40202 14P 20m 2 RS 422 GT09 C300R40202 14P 30m 300m o or 27 422 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS4 9S E 2 E o 2 2 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 7 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 5 System configuration for connecting to CP 9200SH CP 317 Connection cable Communication driver Loom YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Communication omn Cable model connectable Model name distance Option device Model module Connection diagram number equipment Type Built into GOT 2171 GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m Differs according CN1 RS 232 or to PLC side connection RS 232 connection diagram 6 specifications GT15 RS2 9P CP 9200SH 1 GOT fof e CP 317 communication module Built into GOT 2171 GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m CN2 RS 232 or same as above connection RS 232 connection diagram 5 GT15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by YASKAWA E
346. r controller TIR B TIR B TIR A SG TIR A Combination module e M L3 Combination module 4 2 Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2 3 More than 1000 in case of CB series Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM m Connecting terminating resistors When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No pis Z TIO CB100 CB400 568700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 700 2 500 900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 400 name PF901 900 901 MAJJA RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA2
347. r C 3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running 4 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 17 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 14 18 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Sep 2013 SH NA 081199ENG A Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 100E tible with GT Works3 Version1 104J Nov 2013 SH NA 081199ENG B 9 mPat e WIT 51 101055 version Changing the icons of the supported models tible with GT Works3 Version1 108N Jan 2014 SH NA 081199ENG c Pape RSS MESA Writing errors have been corrected This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 1 REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product sh
348. r Type SIEMENS OP Ethernet Network Duplex Settir Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controler with a lst of lower Routing Informatio 9 5 Gateway yr Standard F Ethernet Mutti Communication Gateway Serve 2 Gateway Client Mai Demo GOT Ethernet Setting FTP Server File Transfer Property __ 2 GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 SIEMENS PLC For details of SIEMENS PLCs refer to the following manuals SIEMENS PLC user s Manual Driver Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway z m GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 A Parameter settings Epig Set the following parameters with the SIEMENS software package 1 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE a Settings of IP address and subnet mask Ethernet Setting 9 95 Ex Host Net No Station Unit Type Address E E TE 1 1 57 200 OP 1 1 1 1 Item Setting details IP Address PLC side IP address Cancel Parameters Subnet PLC side subnet mask mask Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is b Fetch port setting indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the ltem sedingidetalls Net No connected Ethernet
349. ram 1 GOT Option device Built into GOT Model GT15 RS4 9S GT 27 Number of connectable equipment 31 PLCs for 1 GOT 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 5 12 2 3 Connecting to K300S When connecting to one PLC Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Seri z Communic C e ed Max OD OR SUI m connectable 5 Cnet I F module ation Type onnection diagram distance ption device odel equipment number GT 27 Built into GOT 93 9 3005 G4L CUEA Rs 232 83 232 connection 15 1 PLC for 1 diagram 2 GT 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K
350. ram distance Type number Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 UseRS 422 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS 422 connection 1200m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 diagram 1 97 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 8 422 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS 422 connection 1200m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 diagram 1 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 UsH RS 422 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 RS 422 connection 1200m IC693PWR332 diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT15 RS4 9S 54 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 11 4 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment 8 PLCs for 1 GOT For the RS 422 connection connecting to the Power Supplies PLC Connection cable GOT Number of EM Cbe maeti Max connectable Power Supplies Model name nication Connection diagram distinco Option device Model equipment Type number GT 27 Built into GOT 93 IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 se ICG93PWR331 IC693CPU366 RS 422 est RS 422 1200m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 d T IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 GT15 RS4 9S 8 PLCs for 1 GOT GT 27 Built into GOT 23 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 sen IC693PWR331 1 693 0363 RS 422 2 RS 422 1200m IC69
351. range which are on selected in Device The device specifications of controllers may differ Device depending on the models even though belonging to the Device name Setting range Ne same series represen tation Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used 100001 When a non existent device or a device number outside output Q Q00001 to 012288 the range is set other objects with correct device settings internal M 00001 to M12288 may not be monitored temporary 001 to T256 9 Setting item 8 system status 5 001 to 128 Decimal a system status SA 5 001 to SA128 pL RAC RL system status SB 8001 to 58128 Device Rican system status SC 5 001 to SC128 By amp G global data G G0001 to G7680 Kind ed system register R00001 to R32640 9 Device 0 65535 analog input register Al 10001 to AI32640 Decimal 5 analog output register AQ AQ0001 to AQ32640 9 Item Description gt Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of 5 word device 2 2 O Set the monitor target of the set device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of the No specified station No 11 7 Precautions GOT clock control The PLC clock data cannot be written to or read from the GOT The settings of
352. re high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT a lt 5 lt gt o E 2 E 2 2 O o 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 27 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Device Information 000000 5 Jets e MB v Kind 5 DEH Device 000000 65534F Network Host 9 Other Network 1 Station 1 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device 2 When setting as a word device Set the device using the format of word address DEC Device Device name 4059 Device No Word address DEC Displays the device type and setting range which are Inform
353. representation Diff tial rel WD000 to WD063 WD Link memory WL WLOO0 to WL511 Decimal Direct access 6 7 W24 0000 to W24 0255 W24 User file W30 2 6 7 User file W31 467 W30 0000 to W30 4095 W31 0000 to W31 4095 User file W108 4 67 W108 0000 to W108 4095 User file W109 0000 to W109 4095 8 109 497 2 Data memo 8 y BDO to BD4095 5 BD Timer set value TSO to 75511 Decimal 0 01s TS Timer current value 3 TRO to TR511 0 01s TR Timer current value 3 W9 0000 to W9 0487 0 1s W9 Counter set value 3 CSO to CS511 CS Counter current 2 3 CRO to CR511 value CR 1 Only reading is possible 2 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 53 Decimal points are not displayed 4 To read write data from to a user file set SI data for the data format of the PLC CPU and 16 bits for data length on GT Designers With any setting other than the above the PLC does not operate normally Data format of the PLC SI Binary 16 bit length Device data bit 16 bits DI Binary 32 bit length Cannot be used BD 8 digit BCD Cannot be used 5 bit specification of a word device is performed after the GOT reads the value do not change the value in the sequence program during this period 6 When itis used with bit specification bit specification of word device the offset function cannot be used 7 When bit specification bit specification of word device is performe
354. rmal pass counter Clears the error counter Parameter settings completed Sends a Message Receive instruction The executing coil turns ON when the CPU receives the command The normal or abnormal completion coil turns ON at the completion of processing Pro Type 1 for extended MEMOBUS or MELSEC 2 for non procedure The normal completion coil turns ON at normal completion Increments the normal pass counter The abnormal completion coil turns ON at abnormal completion Increments the abnormal pass counter 0022 NL 2 Dest DW00025 STORE A Stores the processing results 02 NL 2 Source 0 00000 Dest DWO00026 H STORE Stores the status NEM Source DW00001 Dest DW00027 m STORE A Stores the number of station to which NS Source DW00002 the command is sent Dest DWO00028 STORE E Stores the FC 0025 Source DW00004 Dest DW00029 Stored the data address H STORE A 0027 NL 2 Source DWO00005 Dest DW00030 H STORE A Stores the data size 0025 Source DW00006 Dest DW00031 E H STORE A Stores the remote CPU 0029 Source 0 00007 Dest DW00032 lt 5 lt gt O E z E o 2 2 O o 0029 END IF 0030 NL 1 Eb NL 1 1 When connecting to multiple GOTs set connection numbers individually for each GOT 2 Set the offset for each d
355. roduct contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 27 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485V Communication driver om RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature Connection cable 1 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cabe mode Cable model connectable mo Connection Max Model Communication 5 5 E Max i Model name 5 Connection Option device Model equipment diagram distance name Type distance 4 diagram number number GT 27 z GT Built into GOT Up to 31 7 8 485 RS 232 7 RS 232 15m e SB1 connection 1200m CD485 V connection controllers fir diagram 8 diagram 3 27 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 28 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 11 Connecting to 400 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Communication driver Coo RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Temperature Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Ma Number
356. rol module X TIO with a converter Communication driver Loom SR Mini HG MODBUS aes Connection cable 2 ili ili ca Connection cab Temperature b Connection cable 1 Interface Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model are Commun Cable model vee connectable Series Connection Connection tear Option device Model equipment distance name distance diagram number Type diagram number GT 27 Built into GOT X TIO Up to 31 Gs RS 485 2 RS 232 Total of X TIO SRX connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m and X DO Up diagram 8 diagram 3 27 to 31 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly to temperature control module X TIO Communication driver m RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communication model Max Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram Option device Model Type distance number User i eis RS 485 1200m Built into GOT connection diagram 5 FA LTBGT2R4CBLO5 0 5m 2
357. rors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT PLC CPU servo amplifier and communications For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility r Error code Communication Channel No Debug self chi n alarm display x GOT error ChNo 1 Reset 402 Commupicat ion timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules 17 17 36 CPU error No Error Network error No Error Error message Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors xL O Advanced alarm popup display With the advanced alarm popup display function alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not regardless of the display screen Since comments can be flown from right to left even a long comment can be displayed all For details of the advanced popup display refer to the following manual lt gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 24 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Perform an I O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I O check function If this check ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the I O check screen by Main Menu For GT16 Displ
358. rve 2 Gateway Clent 5 E FTP Server Transfer F Property S d Transmission Speed BPS 7 4 Data Bit d Stop Bit 4 Parity Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Host Address Delay Time ms Av Select Common Controller Setting from the menu The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu Set the following items Manufacturer GE Controller Type GE Series 90 I F Interface to be used Driver GE SNP X The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 gt 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 227 1 1 2 I F communication setting 11 12 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 4 GOT Side Settings Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 00 Delay Time ms 5 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the
359. s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 17 7 3 Ethernet Connection lt gt lt o x 5 O z E o Z Z O o GOT Ethernet setting 2 GOT Ethernet Setting Subnet Mask GOT IP Address Default Gateway Peripheral S W Communication Port No Transparent Port No This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings 192 168 255 255 0 0 5015 5014 Item Description Range GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is Default Gateway connected Only for connection via 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Periphral S W Set the GOT port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 Communication communication Except for 5011 Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Transparent Port transparent function Except for 5011 No Default 5014 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet
360. s the rotary Slave address CH5 to CH8 switch setting value 2 0 2400bps 414 1 4800bps Communication speed 2 9600bps 3 19200bps Data bit configuration 9 0 to 5 Interval time 0 to 250ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select 1 MODBUS When the setting value is 0 communication is not performed 4 communication speed cannot be set to 2400bps or 4800bps on the GOT side Select 2 or 3 5 For details the data bit configuration refer to the following Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 8 None 1 1 8 None 2 2 8 1 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 49 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 DIP switch setting SW3 Set the communication speed and the data bit configuration using the DIP switch SW3 Dip switch SW3 2 Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4800bps Communication 9600bps ON OFF speed 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps ON ON Data bit 8 bits Parity None Stop 2 bits Data bit 8 bits Parity ON None Stop 1 bit Data bit 8 bits Parity Even Stop 1 bit Data bit 8 bits Parity ON ON Odd Stop 1 bit OFF OFF OFF Data bit configuration OFF ON 3 DIP switch settings SW4 Set the communication specifications and the terminat
361. setting 2 5232 7 None USB 9 Host 4 Ethernet 0 x None RS232 Setting 7 Enable the 5V power supply CH No Driver ist 0 x None 25 2nd 0 X None 5 3rd 0 X None mr Wireless LAN x None x Detail Set tting Item Standard I F Setting Description Set channel No and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces CH No Set the CH No according to the intended purpose 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 5 to 8 Used for barcode function RFID function remote personal computer operation function serial 9 Used for connecting Host PC Ethernet download A Used for the report function with a serial printer hard copy function with a serial printer remote personal computer operation function Ethernet VNC server function gateway function and MES interface function Multi Used for multi channel Ethernet connection VF The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected None gt Host Personal computer gt Each communication driver for connected devices Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver 5 Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be conne
362. settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following _ 2 1 1 2 I F communication setting 13 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 SICK Flexi Soft Value Property Transmission Speed BPS 115200 Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps transmission speed used for 19200bps Transmission PA Speed communication with the connected 38400bps E equipment 57600bps Default 115200bps 115200bps Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 0 to 300 ms 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effecti
363. settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 9 12 4 GOT Side Settings 12 5 PLC Side Setting LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC For details of LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLCs refer to the following manual User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Model name Refer to K80S K120S K200S K300S PLC CPU 12 5 1 12 5 1 Connecting to PLC CPU Settings of the communication specifications There is no item to be set using the hardware Set the items using the engineering software for MASTER K Item Station No Setting details 0 to 31 Communication 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600bps G7L CUEB G7L CUEC G6L CUEB G6L CUEC G4L CUEA Cnet I F module 12 5 2 12 10 12 5 PLC Side Setting speed Data bit 7or8 Parity bit None Even Odd Stop bit 10r2 1 For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following gt User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 5 2 Connecting to Cnet I F module Settings of the communication specifications There is no item to be set using the hardware Set the items using the engineering software for MASTER K Item Communication protocol Setting details Dedicated protocol Communication format Data bit 7 0or8 Stop
364. sing multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the System The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT When monitoring a nonexistent or turned off 14 14 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection station If a time out occurs with the initial communication by monitoring a nonexistent or turned off station the time out can delay the communication with the normally operating station Timing to start GOT communication After the PLC starts up start the GOT communication When the GOT starts communication before the PLC starts up a communication timeout occurs Operations during communication During normal communication any operation which makes the GOT restart including writing a project and changing utility data may display the system alarm 402 Communication time
365. sistor refer to the following s 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 5 3 3 Connection Diagram ha lt E O z E 2 2 O 3 4 Side Settings 3 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 4 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment 8 Controller Setting H2 None HITACHI S10mni S10V ork Duplex Setti Routing Informatio Gateway p Communication EL Gateway Serve 88 Gateway Clent amp ccsrectng Mail FTP Server Standard 1 F RS422 485 HITACHI 510 510 File Transfer F Property Value 3 15 0 Redundant Transmission Speed BPS 19200 AD Station No Switch peapa 4 Stop Bit Parity Odd Retry Times 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu Set the following items Manufacturer HITACHI Controller Type HITACHI S10mini S10V I F Interface to be used Driver HITACHI S10mini S10V The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settin
366. sponse after retries the communication times out Default 3times Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup time with the PLC CPU Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90sec Default 3sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 0 to 10000 ms GOT Ethernet setting Ethernet setting n 1 Set GOT Ethernet Setting a controler setting Controller Setting E CH1 AB Control Comp vii g i 2 Manufacturer This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings Controler Type och Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a list of lower scree B k Gateway Standard 1 F Ethernet Muli GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 a Driver EtherNet IP AB Gateway Gent Detal Setting GOT Ethemet Setting 5 fe Transfer F Property Value 4 1 Q Redundant 5 KD Station No Switch GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port 5026 Retry Times Startup Time Sec 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 E Peripheral S W Commun
367. ss is the default value Set the value to the IP address of the PLC to be connected 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 19 m n lt 5 lt gt E Z E o z Z O o 6 3 4 PLC side setting MP2000 2 Setting for the built in MP2300S Ethernet and 218IF series MP920 series 02 Item Set value Range PLC side IP Subnet Mask side settin YASKAWA PLC ae Gateway IP Address 8 For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following Up to 16 one byte Device name Arbitrary manuals characters lt gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual For a connection TN Engineering Port 256 to 65535 with software 2 720 parameter Parameter settings detailed setting Response Time 0 required for Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool Count of Retry 0 communication Number of Retries with GOT 1 Settings for 2181 01 Range of huilt Item Set value Range Ethernet 1 to 4 side Local IP Address address Connection Number 1 5 Range Not required for 1to Response Time 0 communication 20 with GOT lt Local Port 10500 256 to 65534 Count of Retry Not required for oa 0 communication 1 Number of Retries with GOT Node IP Address 14141 01 of GOT 1 M n Port No CNO 1 1 to 20 Node Port Connect
368. stment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE NWARNING e SD card mounted on drive A of the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed processing for the GOT might be interrupted about for 20 seconds The GOT cannot be operated during this period The functions that run in the background including a screen updating alarm logging scripts and others are also interrupted Since this interruption makes an impact to the system operation it might cause failure After checking the light off of SD card access LED remove the SD card NCAUTION If the data storage mounted on the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed the data storage and files are damaged To remove the data storage from the GOT check that the access to the data storage in SD card access LED the system signal and others is not performed When inserting a SD card into the GOT make sure to close the SD card cover Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written When removing the SD card from the GOT make sure
369. subishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vist
370. t be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull from the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metals etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Forthe analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adju
371. t can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 Control CompactLogix ES Information BOOL v 0 Lie zj1 Kind allele ole 41516 p28 Element No 6 Network Hos Other NetworkNo 1 Station 1 Switch to the tag list dialog d Item Description Set the device name file number element number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device Informa Displays the device type and setting range which are selected tion in Device Set the station number of the PLC connected to the specified device Host Select this item when monitoring the host PLC Network Select this when monitoring the other PLCs After selecting set the station number of the Other PLC to be monitored NWNo Set the network No Station No Set the station No 27 Select this button to importing the tag file created by R
372. t device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt gt FUJI PXR PXG PXH Device Information 3 Kind WORD Range Device 0001 1398 Network Station No 1 Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type which is selected in Device Bit Word Set the monitor target of the set device To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Network 1 to 119 216 to 255 To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No 200 to 215 To specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register 51 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register Station No GOT data register GD Setting range 200 GD10 201 GD11 1 to 255 If setting a value outside the range above a device range 214 GD24 error occurs 215 GD25 4 uj zi J O E z O 5 2 E gt 5 2 E 2 2 O The device setting of FUJI temperature controller Devices are set with the coil and register numbers of the temperature controller For parameters such as an address map of coil register n
373. t internal output R RO to R7BF Hexadecimal Rising edge detection DIF 1 DIFO to DIF511 Decimal Falling edge detection DFN DFNO to DFN511 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices _ timer counter word internal output External input WX WxX0000 to WX05A7 Hexadecimal Decimal External output WY WY0000 to WY05A7 Remote external input WX WX1000 to WX4997 Decimal 8 Remote external output WY WY1000 to WY4997 gt First CPU link WL WLO00 to WL3FF g 2nd CPU link WL1 WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal Data area WM WMO000 to WM3FF Timer Counter Elapsed value TC TCO to TC511 Decimal Word internal output WR WRO000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal 1 Overlapped numbers cannot be used 2 Do not set device outside the range If the set device is outside the range the object set by the device within the range may not be displayed 2 14 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC a 3 4 Connectable 18 3 0 3 2 System 3 3 3 3 Connection Diagram 3 5 5 3 4 Side 3 6 E 3 5 PLC Side Saad rrr e 3 7 2 3 6 Device Range that Be 3 8 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 Connectable Model List The following table sho
374. t register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to 2512 for setting When set in default 2 Change the holding register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999 for setting When set in default 3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096 for setting When set in default Continued to next page 4 SR and SW indicate registers virtual register compatible to the data format where internal data of PLC is displayed using Ror W The following shows the difference between the display values of SR SW and those of R W corresponding to the values of PLC internal data PLC internal data 16 bit SR SW R W 9999 9999 9999 1001 1001 1001 1000 1000 1000 999 999 999 0 0 0 1 1 32769 999 999 33767 1000 1000 33768 1001 1001 33769 9999 9999 42767 5 Theinternal coil N1 to N1536 can be set as 0513 to 02048 However setting must not exceed 1 to 0512 and 0513 to 02048 6 Change the input relay 10001 to 14096 to I1 to 14096 for setting When set in default 7 reading is possible 6 4 2 YASKAWA CP9200SH MP900 6 4 3 YASKAWA 9200 Device No Device name Setting range representation i Coil 000000 to MB32767F Decimal Hexadecimal Input relay IB 000000 to MB32767F Hexadecimal 5 Specified bit of the following Wor
375. tarts the Startup Ti 3 to 255 communication with the PLC CPU TEM Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90 sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the 0 to 10000 Delay Time load of the network destination PLC x 10ms Default 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 11 0 2 E 2 O z E 2 2 o Ethernet setting GOT Ethernet Setting Subnet Mask GOT IP Address Default Gateway Peripheral S W Communication Port No Transparent Port No This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings 192 168 255 255 0 0 5015 5014 ES Seas Item Description Range Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to GOT IP Add 7655 Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for
376. ted on the communication setting items Communication setting items in the table shows the names on the FCX Maintenance Page Item Transmission speed Baudrate 1 Set value 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Data length DataBitLength 8bits 7bits Stop bit StopBitLength 1bit 2bits Parity bit Parity 1 none odd even Baudrate 1 DataBitLength 1 StopBitLength 1 Parity 1 FifoMode YES InitialDTRState ON SendFlowControlMode CTS ReceiveFlowControlMode DTR 1 Adjust the settings with GOT communication settings 7 2 5 Communication detail settings 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGA WA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection o 1 lt lt x gt 2 E o 2 2 o 4 Select Reboot Online Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the online mode Defining Logic POU Define Logic POU using Logic Designer peripheral software and download the project to STARDOM 1 Start Logic Designer and create a new project using a template Use STARDOM Serial Communication template 2 Insert FA M3 Emulator Firmware Library to the new project 1 Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer 2 Right click Insert and select Firmware Library 3 Double click the SD_FCXPLCR_LIB folder and double click SD_FCXPLCR_LIB fwl to select it 4 The library path inserted in
377. tegory 3 or higher of GOTs for 1 PLC module TCP UDP 10 or less 71 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation o m lt 5 lt gt O E Z E o Z z O o 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 17 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 2 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacturer Yaskawa Controller YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a list
378. ter Number of Cable model Commun connectable Series Connection diagram Max Model ication fable model Max Option device Model equipment distance name Connection diagram number distance number Type Built into 2 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT Up to 31 RS 485 temperature i 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m connection diagram 15 Use RS 232 connection controllers 4 wire type diagram 1 27 for 1 GOT UT32A GT15 RS2 9P UT35A UT55A UP35A UPISA Built into UM33A 4 GOT 23 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Up to 31 RS 485 or temperature i 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m diagram 16 895 232 connection m controllers 2 wire type diagram 1 27 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P Built into UT52A GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT Up to 31 9 55 m 1200m ML2 RS 232 T 15m temperature 55 4 9 0595 22 connection CT controllers wire UM33A7 TP diagram 1 27 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation For 2 to 7 only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected 8 8 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration Annotation Suffix code Function 10 2 Open network Optional suffix code Without LP Produc 2 wire t Remark with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor
379. the CP 9200SH series CP 312 series or CP 317 series with GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required When multiple GOTs are connected to the CP 9200SH series CP 312 series or CP 317 series ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages FSCAN L ONCOIL 1 0008 58000003 5 000004 H 1 0002 IFON 2 0003 FOR 00000 to 00031 by 00001 3 0007 00000 0100000 001 1044 2 0009 FEND DW 002 2 0010 00003 DWO00002 002 DW 008 2 0012 00000 0100008 003 lt DW 009 2 0014 0100009 22004 1 2 77 DW 010 2 0015 0100010 005 O E DW 011 z 2 0016 16500 DWO00011 006 E DW 012 a 2 0018 16500 gt Dwo00012 007 gt 2 DW 013 2 0020 18499 gt Dw00013 008 1 0022 IEND Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 25 6 3 Ethernet Connection 0023 MSG RCV RECEIVE MESSAGE function standard system functions ONCOIL EXECUTE BUSY DB 210 0024 5 000004 FOUT 08000210 009 ONCOIL ABORT COMPLETE DB 211 0026 5 000004 FOUT 08000211 010 039 DEV TYP ERROR DB 212 0028 00006 F FOUT DB000212 011 041 PRO TYP 0029 00001 Fl CIR NO 0030 00001 lt F CH NO 0031 00003 lt F PARAM 0032 DA00000 DB 211 0039 08000211 4 1036 DW 024 0040 INC 0 00024 DB 212 0041 08000
380. the GOT is 019254 connected the connected network Default 0 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms GOT Default Oms 10 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 9 10 2 Serial Connection CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 6 PLC Side Setting POINT ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the following manuals gt ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manual Directly connecting to the CPU Setting details MicroLogix Co Item L series 10000200 1500 Series ee Series 48006 48006 4800bps pes gt 4 9600bps 9600bps Baud Rate 9600bps 19200bps 19200bps p 38400bps 38400bps Parity EVEN NONE NONE Control Line NO HANDSHAKING Communication Driver DF1 HALF DUPLEX SLAVE Duplicate Packet DISABLE Detection Station Address 0 Error Detection BCC BCC CRC BCC CRC 1 Set the Baud Rate a
381. the IP address make the same setting as that of each Ethernet module set on GT Designer3 Do not set the same IP Address as those of GOT and controller on the Ethernet network For the address setting on GT Designer3 refer to the following Es 11 3 2 Communication detail settings 10 3 4 Precautions When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting Station When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each Station to the GOT gt 10 3 2 mEthernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 3 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 10 14 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 4 Device Range that Can The device ranges of controller tha
382. the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Mwt PIc Fw_lib SD_FCXPLCR_LIB SD_FCXPLCR_LIB fwl 3 Insert FA M3 Emulator User Library to the new project 1 Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer 2 Right click Insert and select User Library 3 Double click SD CFAMS3R PF mwt to select it 4 The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD PF mwt 7 14 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 4 Copy a sample project POU to the new project 1 Open C Install Folder ogicDesignen Projects EXAMPLE J mwt 2 Right click Emulator in the Logic POU under the project tree in the Example J project and select Copy 3 Right click the Logic POU under the project tree in the created new project and select Paste 4 Double click the FAM3 Emulator file in the FAM3 Emulator folder 5 For the following terminals set as shown below REQ terminal TRUE TERMCHAR terminal FALSE PORT terminal COM1 STATION terminal STATION 1 SD CFAM3R OPEN COM1 VALID TRUE COM1 COM1 PORT ERROR ERROR FALSE 4 TERMCHAR STATUS STATUS1 FALSE CHECKSUM STATION1 STATION D D B B COMERR1 COMERR COMERR COMERR1 Definition example of Logic POU 5 Defining the instance Instantiate Logic POU Define an already defined instance to
383. the usage environment settings 9 9 9 Property _ uS _ Value Set the channel of the connected equipment Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit 2 Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even j oa Retry Times 0 1 Timeout Time Sec 3 Manufacturer controler Type Host Address 0 E 3 Delay Time ms 5 Gateway Seve umae J Gateway lent Emm Item Description Range 18 Q Redundant 8 3 Set this item when change the 9600bps 2 Stop Bt 4 T D 19200bps Transmission transmission speed used for r3 X 2 38400bps Retry Times 0 Speed communication with the connected 57600b Timeout Time Sec 5 ae equipment Default 9600bps 115200bps Delay Time ms B Z Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits E the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for ee Z Stop Bit communications Default 1bit Toiv abits SS Specify whether or not to perform a None O parity check and how it is performed Parity Even during communication Odd Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default Otime 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Set the time period for a menu Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the
384. tings Make the communication settings engineering tool using the Setting item PLC side setting Model name Refer to 9600bps 19200bps Sree Series 90 30 11 5 1 ae VersaMaxMicro 11 5 2 Bits Character Tbits 8bits Communication IC693CMM311 11 5 3 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Modules 697 711 11 5 4 Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Port Mode SNP Port Type Slave 11 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 Flow Control NONE Timeout Long a Communication settings Turn Around Delay 4 0 Make the communication settings using the SNP 105 00 to 31 engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on 71 Set to the SNP protocol 2 Set to Slave 53 Setto Long the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only 4 Set to 0 2 5 Set within the range of 00 to 31 ES When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before Sila ieu PLO sito saime the number and set it as 00 to 09 o Port SNP LE Port Type Slave gt Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Flow Control NONE 5 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Stop Bits 1bit 2bits 2 Timeout 3 Long Turn Around 0 SNP ID 001031 Converter Power 6 0 1 Setto SNP 2 Setto Slave 3 Set to Long 4 SettoO 5 Setwithin the range of 00 to 31 When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before the number a
385. tion line processing at TCP timeout error or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit Switch Description Set value No Data 1 OFF ASCII code Writ 2 rite OFF not protect protect 3 4 ON not available Reserved w 5 OFF always 6 Line processing i 7 onTOP OFF close the line timeout ti peration OFF normal operation mode 1 Applicable to only F3LE01 5T 7 20 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE12 OT Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit FSLETZ UT _ Condition setting switch IP address switch Right side view with the cover 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 07 07 lt gt gt S 07 sf S t SEIS AL JO SEI gt 07 07 07 07 me gt gt De su beg beg 55612 6661 Hexadecimal CO A8 FA D2 i 1 1 Decimal 192 168 250 210 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protection or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit Switch us Description Set value No 1 Data code OFF A
386. to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break Before removing the USB device from the GOT follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT After the successful completion dialog is displayed remove the USB device by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations Refer to the GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware for details of the battery directive in the EU member states TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to the GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware for details of the regulated models Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices
387. tup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range Set the network No of the GOT GOT Net No 1 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT 13064 Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernetz mask default gateway peripheral 5 37 GOT transparent port No E W communication port No Ethernet setting Set the GOT port No for the 1024 5010 GoT mM connection with the Ethernet 201 1089994 Communication Except for 5011 Port No module 5012 5013 and Default 5017 49153 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times retries the communication times out Default 3times Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup Time DE to 255sec communication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 90sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the Delay Time load of the network destination PLC Default 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be 0 to 10000 X 10 ms changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User
388. ture Temperature GOTside ______ _ controller side controller side it rl 1 iy spa 1 i 7 E pd pg SDB 6 1 RDA 2 J T NE A RDB 7 7 Nu RSA 3 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W CSA 4 RSB 8 CSB 9 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 2 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For the procedure to setthe terminating res
389. ual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of prod
390. uction shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued CON ou gt 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mit
391. ults communication timeout of the stations monitored by the GOT When an abnormal state is detected the function assigns the information of the faulty station to the GOT special register GS 1 No of faulty stations a the Ethernet connection except for the Ethernet multiple connection Total No of the faulty CPU are stored Device b15 to b8 b7 to bO GS230 00H fixed No of faulty stations b For Ethernet multiple connection The total No of the faulty devices is stored Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to bO Ch1 GS280 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch2 GS300 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch3 GS320 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch4 GS340 00H fixed No of faulty stations When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display check mask processing with data operation tab as the following For the data operation refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help QG Numerical Display Data Operation tab Numerical Display Advanced Settings Device f 0 Extended Trigger M Only the setting of selected Operation Type is valid Operation Type None Data Operation 2 Script V Bit Mask Mask Type Mask Pattern 00 Shift Left Right Data Operation 9 None Data Expression Set mask processing to the upper eight bits b8 to b15 of GS230 on Numerical Dis
392. umber and a parameter corresponding to each number refer to the manual of the temperature controller to be used 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 19 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 6 1 FUJI PXR PXG PXH Device name Setting range Device No representation Bit data 0 00001 to 00001 8 Decimal 9 Bit data 1 10001 to 10016 m Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices 8 Word data 3 30001 to 31398 2 5 Decimal g Word data 4 40001 to 43776 54 Only reading is possible 5 7 Precautions Station number settings of temperature controller In the system configuration the temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 97 5 4 2 Communication detail settings FIX processing of temperature controller The temperature controller power must not be turned off during the FIX processing Otherwise data within the non volatile memory will corrupt and the temperature controller will be unavailable GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a commu
393. ure HA900 85 485 1200m cpassiv RS 232 sss RS 232 15m p P HA904 connection diagram 8 connection diagram 3 GT controllers for 1 GOT 27 RMC500 SA100 GT15 RS2 9P SA200 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 22 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 8 Connection to 1 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver mM RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Number of E 1 SE ue Cable model T m uh pm connectable PE icati Connection diagram onnection diagra pilonigevice 9 equipment Type number number Built into GOT Up to 31 2 1 RS 422 connection temperature RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1m A 1000m controllers for 1 W BF 02 3000 3m diagram 1 97 GOT GT15 RS4 9S GT 27 ser E i e RS 485 connection Built into GOT 93 THV A1 diagram 1 GT FA LTBGT2RACBLOS 0 5m 2 27 ae ser E i t W BF 02 0500 0 5m es RS 485 connection FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 33 p to RS 485 W BF 02 1000 1 3 1200 2 sd deis BF 02 1m m FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 2m controllers for 1 W BF 02 3000 3m COT W BF 01 0500 0 5m W BF 01 1000 1m W BF 01 3000 3m GT15 RS4 TE or RS 485 connection diagram 4
394. ure controller connection The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection non connection with Ethernet With Ethernet connection 1 to 128 With other than Ethernet connection 0 to 127 Example With Ethernet connection when PC No 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty GS327 b3 is set The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection Device Station No Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 For details on the GS Device refer to the following manual _ 5 GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Appendix 2 3 GOT special register GS 3 Networ
395. ve 13 3 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 3 GOT Side Settings CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 4 PLC Side Setting SICK PLC For details of SICK PLCs refer to the following manual gt User s Manual of the SICK PLC 13 4 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft Communication settings Communication settings are not required since the following contents are fixed Setting item Controller Side Settings Communication speed 115200bps Fixed Data bit 8bits Fixed Parity bit Without Fixed Stop bit 1bit Fixed 13 4 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 4 PLC Side Setting 13 5 Device Range That Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows d EFI output EQ Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the Device maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 EQ Wi 41 5 z The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the Device Byte number 0 to 2 same series name EFI number 1 to 3 Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used 2 Engineering software for SICK and device When a non existent device or a device number outside representation of GT Designer3 the range is set other objects with correct device settings The engineering software for SICK and the device ma
396. vice settings of HITACHI PLC 1 When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of address word unit bit number 0 to F Device X 000 y SS Bit position 0 to F Device name i Address word units 2 When setting a word device For external input XW external output YW internal register RW extended internal register MW AW keep relay KW on delay timer TW one shot timer UW up down counter CW global link register GW event register EW system register SW transfer register JW and receive register QW set as follows Device xw 000 L to 0 Address word units Device name 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set AW AW000 to AWFFO Keep relay KW KWO000 to KWFFO On delay timer TW 000 to TW1FO 3 6 1 HITACHI S10mini S10V Device Device name Setting range represen tation External input X X000 to XFFF External output Y Y000 to YFFF Internal register R 000 to RFFF Keep relay K to KFFF Extended int regist xtended internal register M000 to MFFF M Extended internal register A000 to AFFF A 7 Hexadec On delay timer T T000 to T1FF imal One shot timer U U000 to UOFF Up down counter C to CFF gt 6 Global link register GL GL000 to GLFFF amp Event re
397. wire type Standard code model Product without the additional contact output points DO Other than 3 1 and with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model 2 Product with RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire With CH3 type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 3 mE BEN 2 wire type and with the power supply for 24 sensor Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model iu Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS 485 communication ports and without 2 1 7 the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 6 1 Without LP and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor 7 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED c a x 2 a 2 2 gt W E lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o
398. ws the connectable models Series Model name Clock Hp Connectable model Refer to LQP510 RS 232 GT CUI S10V LQP520 5 422 3321 LQP800 LQPO000 26 RS 232 GT GT S10mini LQP010 oF 3 22 LQP011 LQP120 3 2 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 Connectable Model List 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 1 Connecting to S10V Communication driver em HITACHI S10mini S10V Connection cable a PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Communication Cable model Max Oen IE Tee connectable A cation ENDE de name module Es Connection diagram number distance um Miss equipment I GT O 27 LE Built into GOT 2 GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m Lr LQE560 RS 232 15 55 RS 232 connection diagram GT 1 27 2 GT15 RS2 9P 2 9 41 LQP520 27 module GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m e GT GT09 C4100R41301 9S 10m Built into GOT 23 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m or GT 27 ser 1 H CARS 422 connection diagram GT15 RS4 9S 2 GT 27 GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m Built into GOT 23 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m LQP510 RS 422 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m 1 GOT for 1 PLC or GT P 27 558 422 connection diagram GT15 RS4 98 2 2 Product manufactured by Hitachi Ltd For details of the product contact
399. x I F Interface to be used Driver EtherNet IP AB Gateway The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 227 11 3 2 m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 2 1 1 2 I F communication setting can be 10 12 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 Ethernet Connection ll Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property _ Value GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5026 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range GOT Net No 4 No of the GOT 110239 Set the station No of the GOT 11064 Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral S 5 GOT DE W communication port No Ethernet setting transparent port No 1024 to 5010 GOT Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Communication connection with the Ethernet module Except for 5011 Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 44818 and 49153 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry When receiving no re
400. y not be monitored representation of GT Designer3 are different Set the device by referring to the following table Setting item Daie GT Designer Engineering software for SICK lt gt SICK Flexi Soft a 00 I O model name Mem I 004 12 0 Module number such as XTIO mimi A 1 8 Input position LIL1 1 12 Dec Module number 5 4 s teanga A 1 8 Input position jaja _ Input postion AA A AICILT QA e Back QLILI A AA A model name OO 1 12 Dec Module number such as XTIO L d A 1 8 Output position LILI 1 12 Dec Module number AA 1 8 Output position Description Set the device name device number and bit number LQ 00 3 b Result Device The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of nid a L1 0 3 Byte number word device nd AA 0 7 Bit position information Displays the device type and its setting range selected in WEA A A A A O Device CPU type CPUO CPU1 LI 0 3 Byte number AAAA ype 0 3 B b 0 7 Bit position 0 9 Byte number AA 0 7 Bit position POINT z A A A 0 EFIO O Byte A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 1 Device settings of SICK Safety controller EFI number 1 2 EFI number L1 1 3 Device number a Input I Output Q 0 3 Byte number 1 3 Device number ET AA 0 3 Byte number
401. ype YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA500 Default Otime FA M3 Setthe time period for a communication to Timeout Time time out 1 to 30sec I F Interface to be used Default 3sec Driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer the GOT Controller Type I F and Driver are set Default Oms Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 7 2 5mCommunication detail settings CNAA 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility Delay Time 0 to 300 ms Click the OK button when settings are completed The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project For details on the Utility refer to the following The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 7 8 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 6 PLC side setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals 57 YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Model name Refer to CPU d
402. ype 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model With 4 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line a 2 E 2 2 3 gt W lt lt o x gt 2 9 E o 2 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 21 8 3 Connection Diagram 16 RS 485 connection diagram 16 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4 RS232C RS485 i a interface converter Temperature controller i Temperature controller 5 D ar E mm m 1 RDA r1 1 RDB E E RDB s 4 L4 Li E RDE i 1 SDA 1 i 1 SDA 1 m H i a SDA 1 SDB bol dd Pa a n SDB Sc 5 1 1 m SG lo lo Li 6 4 I 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series i UT35A Signal name iti 2 UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A Ee D UP55A product condition A

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

XS TRIGEAR OWNERS MANUAL  1 - Robot MarketPlace    Quick Instruction Guide www.philips.com/welcome Type HD8761  Acer 4100 Laptop User Manual  Wine IN25 - Coltburg Store        

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file